WO2014039503A1 - Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof - Google Patents

Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014039503A1
WO2014039503A1 PCT/US2013/057959 US2013057959W WO2014039503A1 WO 2014039503 A1 WO2014039503 A1 WO 2014039503A1 US 2013057959 W US2013057959 W US 2013057959W WO 2014039503 A1 WO2014039503 A1 WO 2014039503A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pharmaceutical composition
compound
independently
substituted
composition according
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2013/057959
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Charles Linder
Eliahu Heldman
Sarina Grinberg
Original Assignee
Lauren Sciences Llc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Lauren Sciences Llc filed Critical Lauren Sciences Llc
Priority to CA2883788A priority Critical patent/CA2883788A1/en
Priority to AU2013312910A priority patent/AU2013312910B2/en
Priority to EP13835778.5A priority patent/EP2892512A4/en
Publication of WO2014039503A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014039503A1/en
Priority to IL237540A priority patent/IL237540B/en
Priority to US14/638,448 priority patent/US20150238611A1/en
Priority to US16/044,797 priority patent/US20190076533A1/en
Priority to US17/131,475 priority patent/US20210106687A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/06—Organic compounds, e.g. natural or synthetic hydrocarbons, polyolefins, mineral oil, petrolatum or ozokerite
    • A61K47/26—Carbohydrates, e.g. sugar alcohols, amino sugars, nucleic acids, mono-, di- or oligo-saccharides; Derivatives thereof, e.g. polysorbates, sorbitan fatty acid esters or glycyrrhizin
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K41/00—Medicinal preparations obtained by treating materials with wave energy or particle radiation ; Therapies using these preparations
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/69—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit
    • A61K47/6921—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere
    • A61K47/6923—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere the form being an inorganic particle, e.g. ceramic particles, silica particles, ferrite or synsorb
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/69—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit
    • A61K47/6921—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere
    • A61K47/6927—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere the form being a solid microparticle having no hollow or gas-filled cores
    • A61K47/6929—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the conjugate being characterised by physical or galenical forms, e.g. emulsion, particle, inclusion complex, stent or kit the form being a particulate, a powder, an adsorbate, a bead or a sphere the form being a solid microparticle having no hollow or gas-filled cores the form being a nanoparticle, e.g. an immuno-nanoparticle
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K49/00—Preparations for testing in vivo
    • A61K49/06—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations
    • A61K49/18—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes
    • A61K49/1818—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes particles, e.g. uncoated or non-functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles
    • A61K49/1821—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes particles, e.g. uncoated or non-functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles
    • A61K49/1824—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes particles, e.g. uncoated or non-functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised nanoparticles
    • A61K49/1827—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes particles, e.g. uncoated or non-functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised nanoparticles having a (super)(para)magnetic core, being a solid MRI-active material, e.g. magnetite, or composed of a plurality of MRI-active, organic agents, e.g. Gd-chelates, or nuclei, e.g. Eu3+, encapsulated or entrapped in the core of the coated or functionalised nanoparticle
    • A61K49/1833—Nuclear magnetic resonance [NMR] contrast preparations; Magnetic resonance imaging [MRI] contrast preparations characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, microcapsules, liposomes particles, e.g. uncoated or non-functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised microparticles or nanoparticles coated or functionalised nanoparticles having a (super)(para)magnetic core, being a solid MRI-active material, e.g. magnetite, or composed of a plurality of MRI-active, organic agents, e.g. Gd-chelates, or nuclei, e.g. Eu3+, encapsulated or entrapped in the core of the coated or functionalised nanoparticle having a (super)(para)magnetic core coated or functionalised with a small organic molecule
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/0002—Galenical forms characterised by the drug release technique; Application systems commanded by energy
    • A61K9/0009—Galenical forms characterised by the drug release technique; Application systems commanded by energy involving or responsive to electricity, magnetism or acoustic waves; Galenical aspects of sonophoresis, iontophoresis, electroporation or electroosmosis
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y5/00—Nanobiotechnology or nanomedicine, e.g. protein engineering or drug delivery
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K9/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by special physical form
    • A61K9/10—Dispersions; Emulsions
    • A61K9/127—Liposomes
    • A61K9/1271—Non-conventional liposomes, e.g. PEGylated liposomes, liposomes coated with polymers
    • A61K9/1272—Non-conventional liposomes, e.g. PEGylated liposomes, liposomes coated with polymers with substantial amounts of non-phosphatidyl, i.e. non-acylglycerophosphate, surfactants as bilayer-forming substances, e.g. cationic lipids
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y15/00—Nanotechnology for interacting, sensing or actuating, e.g. quantum dots as markers in protein assays or molecular motors

Definitions

  • bolaamphiphilic compounds complexes thereof with magnetic nanoparticles, and pharmaceutical compositions thereof. Also provided are methods of delivering magnetic nanoparticles encapsulated in bolavesicles into human and animals and targeting the nanoparticles to specific sites within the body, particularly the brain and to distict regions of the brain. This is done using the compounds, complexes and pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
  • Magnetic nanoparticles may be used for imaging and for control drug delivery.
  • magnetic nanoparticles can emit signals when under magnetic fields or other imaging apparatuses.
  • Magnetic particles when exposed to alternating magnetic field (AMF) emit heat that can be used to disrupt nanoparticles that contain the drug, thus releasing drugs which are encapsulated together with the magnetic particles in vesicles or liposomes.
  • AMF alternating magnetic field
  • the magnetic particles should be delivered to the patient and be accessible to a variety of tissues, particularly sites within the body where the disease is localized or where the drug induces its therapeutic action. Accessibility to tissues may require that the magnetic particles will cross biological barriers.
  • the brain is an example of an organ with limited accessibility.
  • the brain is a highly specialized organ, and its sensitive components and functioning are protected by a barrier known as the blood-brain barrier (BBB).
  • BBB blood-brain barrier
  • the brain capillary endothelial cells (BCECs) that form the BBB play important role in brain physiology by maintaining selective permeability and preventing passage of various compounds from the blood into the brain 1 .
  • One consequence of the highly effective barrier properties of the BBB is the limited penetration of therapeutic agents into the brain, which makes treatment of many brain diseases extremely challenging 2 .
  • WO 02/05501 1 and WO 03/047499 both of the same applicant, disclose amphiphilic derivatives composed of at least one fatty acid chain derived from natural vegetable oils such as vernonia oil, lesquerella oil and castor oil, in which functional groups such as epoxy, hydroxy and double bonds were modified into polar and ionic headgroups.
  • WO 10/128504 discloses a series of amphiphiles
  • bolamphiphiles (amphiphiles with two head groups) useful for targeted drug delivery of insulin, insulin analogs, TNF, GDNF, DNA, RNA (including siRNA), enkephalin class of analgesics, and others.
  • bolaamphiphiles are a unique class of compounds that have two hydrophilic headgroups placed at each ends of a hydrophobic domain.
  • Bolaamphiphiles can form vesicles that consist of monolayer membrane that surrounds an aqueous core 3 .
  • Vesicles made from natural bolaamphiphiles, such as those extracted from archaebacteria (archaesomes) are very stable and, therefore, might be employed for targeted drug delivery 4 .
  • bolaamphiphiles from archaebacteria are heterogeneous and cannot be easily extracted or chemically synthesized.
  • MNPs magnetic nanoparticles
  • Various approaches have been developed for the use of MNPs in biomedical applications, for example binding pharmaceutical substances to MNPs and their targeting to the desired organs or body regions by means of a magnetic field 10 .
  • MNPs displaying recognition elements can be used for targeted diagnostics through the use of magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) technologies 11 13 .
  • MRI magnetic resonance imaging
  • MNPs exhibit some attractive properties: they can be easily visualized using microscopy techniques, are spatially controlled while inside the human body by external (or internal implanted) magnetic fields that are considered physiologically safe.
  • MNPs can be heated by an alternating magnetic field to trigger drug release or to produce local hyperthermia/ablation 14 .
  • MNP delivery systems which can have desired characteristic for either drug delivery and or diagnostic purposes.
  • These MNP delivery systems, their compositions, and methods of preparation are described herein are directed toward this end.
  • compositions comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex.
  • the bolaamphiphile complexes comprise one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
  • novel magnetic bolavesicles comprising bolaamphiphilic compounds.
  • nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles are nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
  • kits for delivering drugs or imaging agents into animal or human brain comprising the step of administering to the animal or human a pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound, metal, or an alloy capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound consists of two hydrophilic headgroups linked through a long hydrophobic chain.
  • the hydrophilic headgroup comprises an amino containing group.
  • the hydrophilic headgroup is a tertiary or quaternary amino containing group.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula I:
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently a hydrophilic head group
  • L 1 is alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with C 1 -C 20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is a quaternary ammonium salt.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI:
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently a hydrophilic head group
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is independently -C(R 3 ) 2 -, -N(R 3 )- or -0-;
  • each R la , R lb , R 3 , and R 4 is independently H or Ci-C 8 alkyl
  • each R 2a and R 2b is independently H , Ci-C 8 alkyl, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG 1 or O-HG 2 ; each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20; and each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently selected from:
  • X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl; each R 8 is independently
  • ml is 0 or 1
  • each nl3, nl4, and nl5 is independently an integer from 1-20.
  • FIG. 1 Magnetic bolavesicle characterization.
  • A. Cryo-TEM image of the prepared MNPs. Scale bar 20 nm;
  • B. Cryo-TEM images of bolavesicles. Left: without MNPs; right: with embedded MNPs. Scale bar 50 nm;
  • EPR Electron paramagnetic resonance
  • Figure 2 Bolavesicle interactions with model membranes.
  • Figure 3 b.End3 cell uptake of bolavesicles analyzed by FACS.
  • the cells were o o incubated with the studied vesicles or with the control solutions for 5 hr at 4 C (left) or at 37 C (right). At the end of the incubation the cells were extensively washed and analyzed by FACS.
  • FIG. 4 Intracellular CF transport by bolavesicles. Intracellular localization and fate of magnetic and non-magnetic bolavesicles, respectively, in b.End3 cells. The cells were incubated with the bolavesicles or with the control solutions for 5 h at 37°C. At the end of the incubation the cells were extensively washed, stained with nuclear stain (DAPI) and analyzed using confocal microscopy. Left column: DAPI fluorescence; Middle column: CF fluorescence; right column: merged images.
  • DAPI fluorescence Left column: DAPI fluorescence
  • Middle column Middle column: CF fluorescence
  • right column merged images.
  • FIG. 5 Cell motion induced by an external magnetic field. Live confocal imaging of b.End3 cells following 5-hour incubation with bolavesicles. Top row: Cells incubated with magnetic bolavesicles (GLH-20). Rapid movement of the cells towards the externally- placed magnet was recorded. Bottom row: Cells incubated with conventional (non-magnetic) bolavesicles (GLH-20). No cell movement has been observed.
  • the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer.
  • Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques et ah,
  • Ci-6 alkyl is intended to encompass, Ci, C 2 , C3, C 4 , C5, C6, Ci-6, Ci_5, Ci ⁇ , Ci_3, Ci_2, C 2 _6, C 2 _5, C 2 _4, C 2 _3, C3_6, C3_5, C 4 _6, C 4 _5, and Cs_6 alkyl.
  • analogue means one analogue or more than one analogue.
  • Alkyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms (“Ci_2o alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms (“Ci_i2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms (“Ci_io alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 9 carbon atoms (“Ci_9 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms (“Ci_8 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 7 carbon atoms (“Ci_7 alkyl”). In some embodiments,
  • an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms (“Ci_6 alkyl”, also referred to herein as "lower alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms (“Ci_5 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms (“Ci_4 alkyl”). In some
  • an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms (“Ci_3 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms (“Ci_2 alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom (“Ci alkyl”). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms (“C2-6 alkyl”).
  • Ci_6 alkyl groups include methyl (Ci), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C 3 ), isopropyl (C3), n-butyl (C 4 ), tert-butyl (C 4 ), sec-butyl (C 4 ), iso-butyl (C 4 ), n-pentyl (C5), 3-pentanyl (C5), amyl (C5), neopentyl (C5), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C5), tertiary amyl (C5), and n-hexyl (Ce).
  • alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C 7 ), n-octyl (C 8 ) and the like.
  • each instance of an alkyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkyl") with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkyl group is unsubstituted Ci-w alkyl (e.g., -CH 3 ).
  • the alkyl group is substituted Ci-10 alkyl.
  • Alkylene refers to a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical.
  • exemplary divalent alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -) and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds ("C 2 _ 2 o alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms ("C 2 _io alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms ("C 2 _9 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms (“C 2 _8 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms (“C 2 _ 7 alkenyl”).
  • an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms ("C 2 _6 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2 _5 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms ("C 2 ⁇ alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C 2 _3 alkenyl”). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms ("C 2 alkenyl”). The one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl).
  • Examples of C 2 ⁇ alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C 2 ), 1- propenyl (C 3 ), 2-propenyl (C 3 ), 1-butenyl (C 4 ), 2-butenyl (C 4 ), butadienyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • Examples of C 2 _6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C5), pentadienyl (C5), hexenyl (Ce), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C 7 ), octenyl (Cs), octatrienyl (Cs), and the like.
  • each instance of an alkenyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkenyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkenyl") with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkenyl group is unsubstituted C 2 _ 10 alkenyl.
  • the alkenyl group is substituted C 2 _ 10 alkenyl.
  • alkenylene refers a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical.
  • Alkynyl refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds, and optionally one or more double bonds ("C2-2 0 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms ("C2-1 0 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms (“C 2 _9 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms ("C 2 - 8 alkynyl").
  • an alkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms ("C 2 _ 7 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms ("C 2 _6 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms (“C 2 _s alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms (“C2-3 alkynyl”). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms ("C 2 alkynyl”).
  • the one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl).
  • Examples of C2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C 2 ), 1-propynyl (C 3 ), 2-propynyl (C 3 ), 1-butynyl (C 4 ), 2-butynyl (C 4 ), and the like.
  • Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C5), hexynyl (Ce), and the like.
  • alkynyl examples include heptynyl (C 7 ), octynyl (Cs), and the like.
  • each instance of an alkynyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkynyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkynyl") with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent.
  • the alkynyl group is unsubstituted C 2 _ 10 alkynyl.
  • the alkynyl group is substituted C2-10 alkynyl.
  • Alkynylene refers a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical.
  • exemplary divalent alkynylene groups include, but are not limited to, ethynylene, propynylene, and the like.
  • '"Aryl refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic)
  • an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms (“C6 aryl”; e.g., phenyl).
  • an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms ("C 10 aryl”; e.g., naphthyl such as 1- naphthyl and 2-naphthyl).
  • an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms ("Ci4 aryl”; e.g., anthracyl).
  • Aryl also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system.
  • Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexalene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, and trinaphthalene.
  • Particularly aryl groups include pheny
  • the aryl group is unsubstituted C6-i 4 aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is substituted C6-i 4 aryl.
  • R and R may be hydrogen and at least one of R and R is each independently selected from Ci-Cs alkyl, Ci-Cs haloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, alkanoyl, Ci-Cs alkoxy, heteroaryloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR 58 COR 59 ,
  • S0 2 NR 58 R 59 S-alkyl, SOalkyl, S0 2 alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl, S0 2 aryl; or R 56 and R 57 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O, or S.
  • R 60 and R 61 are independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, substituted
  • fused aryl refers to an aryl having two of its ring carbon in common with a second aryl ring or with an aliphatic ring.
  • Alkyl is a subset of alkyl and aryl, as defined herein, and refers to an optionally substituted alkyl group substituted by an optionally substituted aryl group.
  • Heteroaryl refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6 or 10 ⁇ electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur ("5-10 membered heteroaryl").
  • the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heteroaryl includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system.
  • Heteroaryl also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system.
  • Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like
  • the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-10 membered heteroaryl").
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-8 membered heteroaryl").
  • a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-6 membered heteroaryl").
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted heteroaryl") or substituted (a "substituted heteroaryl") with one or more substituents.
  • the heteroaryl group is unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl.
  • Exemplary 6- membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl.
  • Exemplary 5,6- bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl,
  • benzotriazolyl benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl.
  • Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
  • each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR , O, and S; and R is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • R is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl. Examples of representative aryl having hetero atoms containing substitution
  • each W is selected from C(R ) 2 , NR , O, and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR 66 , O and S; and R 66 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C 8 alkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, and 5- 10 membered heteroaryl.
  • Heteroaralkyl is a subset of alkyl and heteroaryl, as defined herein, and refers to an optionally substituted alkyl group substituted by an optionally substituted heteroaryl group.
  • Carbocyclyl or “carbocyclic” refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("C 3 _io carbocyclyl") and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system.
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms ("C 3 _s carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C 3 -6 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C 3 -6 carbocyclyl”).
  • a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("Cs-io carbocyclyl").
  • Exemplary C3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C 3 ), cyclopropenyl (C 3 ), cyclobutyl (C 4 ), cyclobutenyl (C 4 ), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclohexyl (Ce), cyclohexenyl (Ce), cyclohexadienyl (Ce), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3 _s carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3 -6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ), cycloheptenyl (C 7 ), cycloheptadienyl (C 7 ), cycloheptatrienyl (C 7 ), cyclooctyl (C 8 ), cyclooctenyl (C 8 ), bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptanyl (C 7 ), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C 8 ), and the like.
  • Exemplary C 3 _io carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C 3 _s carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C 9 ), cyclononenyl (C 9 ), cyclodecyl (Cio), cyclodecenyl (Cio), octahydro-lH-indenyl (C 9 ), decahydronaphthalenyl (Cio), spiro[4.5]decanyl (Cio), and the like.
  • the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic (“monocyclic carbocyclyl”) or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system (“bicyclic carbocyclyl”) and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • “Carbocyclyl” also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system.
  • each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e. , unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted carbocyclyl") or substituted (a "substituted carbocyclyl") with one or more substituents.
  • the carbocyclyl group is unsubstituted C3_io carbocyclyl.
  • the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C3_io carbocyclyl.
  • “carbocyclyl” is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("C3_io cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms ("C3_s cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms (“C3_6 cycloalkyl”). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C5_6 cycloalkyl").
  • a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("Cs-io cycloalkyl").
  • C5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C 5 ) and cyclohexyl (C 5 ).
  • Examples of C3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C 3 ) and cyclobutyl (C 4 ).
  • C3_s cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C 7 ) and cyclooctyl (C 8 ). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted cycloalkyl") or substituted (a
  • substituted cycloalkyl with one or more substituents.
  • the cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted C3_io cycloalkyl.
  • the cycloalkyl group is substituted C3-10 cycloalkyl.
  • Heterocyclyl refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non- aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon ("3-10 membered heterocyclyl").
  • the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits.
  • a heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic ("monocyclic heterocyclyl”) or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system ("bicyclic heterocyclyl”), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated.
  • Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings.
  • Heterocyclyl also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system.
  • each instance of heterocyclyl is independently optionally substituted, i. e.
  • a heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl.
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon (“5-10 membered heterocyclyl").
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non- aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-8 membered heterocyclyl").
  • a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-6 membered heterocyclyl").
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl.
  • Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl.
  • Exemplary 6- membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl.
  • Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl.
  • Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl.
  • Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a e aryl ring include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like.
  • Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like.
  • Particular examples of heterocyclyl groups are shown in the following illustrative
  • each W is selected from CR , C(ic')2, NR , O, and S; and each Y is selected from NR 67 , O, and S; and R 67 is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl.
  • heterocyclyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (carbamoyl or amido), aminocarbonylamino, aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, keto, nitro, thiol, -S-alkyl, -S-aryl, -S(0)-alkyl,-S(0)-aryl, -S(0) 2 -alkyl, and -S(0) 2 - aryl.
  • Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.
  • Hetero when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g., heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g., heterocyclyl, aryl, e.g,.
  • heteroaryl cycloalkenyl, e.g,. cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and particularly from 1 to 3 heteroatoms.
  • Acyl refers to a radical -C(0)R 20 , where R 20 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • R 21 is Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • R23 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl,, as defined herein, or R 22 is an amino protecting group.
  • acylamino groups include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino.
  • acylamino groups are -NR 24 C(0)-Ci-C 8 alkyl, -NR 24 C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Ci 0 aryl), - NR 24 C(O)-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR 24 C(0)-(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Cio cycloalkyl), and - NR 24 C(O)-(CH2) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, and each R 24 independently represents H or Ci-Cs alkyl.
  • R 25 is H, Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; and R 26 is H, Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy;
  • C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroa r yl a lkyl, each of which is substi t ut e d with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl; provided that at least one of R 25 and R 26 is other than H.
  • Acyloxy refers to a radical -OC(0)R 27 , where R 27 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein.
  • Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl,
  • R 28 is Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group -OR where R is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n- propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2- dimethylbutoxy.
  • Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e. with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
  • R 29 is a group that has 1 or more substituents, for instance, from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C6-C1 0 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(0) 2 - and aryl-S(0)2-.
  • substituents for instance, from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C6-C1 0 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C1
  • Exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups include, but are not limited to, -O- (CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Cio aryl), -O-(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -0-(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Cio cycloalkyl), and - O-(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
  • Particular exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are -OCF 3 , -OCH 2 CF 3 , -OCH 2 Ph, -OCH 2 -cyclopropyl, - OCH 2 CH 2 OH, and -OCH 2 CH 2 NMe 2 .
  • Amino refers to the radical -NH 2 .
  • Substituted amino refers to an amino group of the formula -N(R 38 ) 2 wherein R 38 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R 38 is not a hydrogen.
  • each R 38 is independently selected from: hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C8 alkenyl, C3-C8 alkynyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, or C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl; or Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkenyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkynyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy, or -(CH 2 ) t (C 6 -Cio aryl), -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), - (CH 2 ) t (C3-Cio cycloalkyl), or -(CH 2 ) t (4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer between 0 and 8, each of which is substituted by unsubsti
  • Cio aryl -NR 39 -(CH 2 ) t (5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR 39 -(CH 2 ) t (C 3 -Cio cycloalkyl), and - NR 39 -(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, for instance 1 or 2, each R 39 independently represents H or Ci-Cs alkyl and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4
  • substituted amino includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino, and substituted dialkylamino as defined below.
  • Substituted amino encompasses both monosubstituted amino and disubstituted amino groups.
  • Carbamoyl or “amido” refers to the radical -C(0)NH 2 .
  • Substituted carbamoyl or “substituted amido” refers to the radical -C(0)N(R 62 ) 2 wherein each R 62 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R 62 is not a hydrogen.
  • R 62 is selected from H, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C1 0 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C1 0 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at
  • Exemplary 'substituted carbamoyl' groups include, but are not limited to, -C(O)
  • Cyano refers to the radical -CN.
  • Halo or “halogen” refers to fluoro (F), chloro (CI), bromo (Br), and iodo (I).
  • the halo group is either fluoro or chloro. In further embodiments, the halo group is iodo.
  • Haldroxy refers to the radical -OH.
  • Niro refers to the radical -N0 2 .
  • Cycloalkylalkyl refers to an alkyl radical in which the alkyl group is substituted with a cycloalkyl group.
  • Typical cycloalkylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, cycloheptylmethyl, cyclooctylmethyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, cycloheptylethyl, and cyclooctylethyl, and the like.
  • Heterocyclylalkyl refers to an alkyl radical in which the alkyl group is substituted with a heterocyclyl group.
  • Typical heterocyclylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinylmethyl, piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl, morpholinylmethyl, pyrrolidinylethyl, piperidinylethyl, piperazinylethyl, morpholinylethyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms and having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused and bridged ring systems and having at least one and particularly from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation.
  • Such cycloalkenyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopropenyl, and the like.
  • Fused cycloalkenyl refers to a cycloalkenyl having two of its ring carbon atoms in common with a second aliphatic or aromatic ring and having its olefinic unsaturation located to impart aromaticity to the cycloalkenyl ring.
  • Ethylene refers to substituted or unsubstituted -(C-C)-.
  • Nonrogen-containing heterocyclyl means a 4- to 7- membered non- aromatic cyclic group containing at least one nitrogen atom, for example, but without limitation, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 2- pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), azetidine, pyrrolidone, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, 2- pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. Particular examples include azetidine, piperidone and piperazone.
  • Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted (e.g., "substituted” or "unsubstituted” alkyl,
  • substituted means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction.
  • a "substituted” group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position.
  • substituted is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound.
  • the present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound.
  • heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
  • Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen, -CN,
  • each instance of R aa is, independently, selected from Ci_io alkyl, Ci-w perhaloalkyl, C 2 _io alkenyl, C 2 _io alkynyl, C 3 _io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-i 4 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R aa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups;
  • each instance of R cc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, Ci_io alkyl, Ci_io perhaloalkyl, C 2 _io alkenyl, C 2 _io alkynyl, C 3 _io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two R cc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R dd groups;
  • each instance of R ee is, independently, selected from Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 perhaloalkyl, C 2 _6 alkenyl, C 2 _6 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R ss groups;
  • each instance of R ff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 perhaloalkyl, C 2 -6 alkenyl, C 2 _6 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R ff groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 R ss groups; and each instance of R 88 is, independently, halogen, -CN, -N0 2 , -N 3 , -S0 2 H, -S0 3 H, -OH, -OC 1-6 alkyl, -ON(d_ 6 alkyl) 2 , -N(d
  • a "counterion” or “anionic counterion” is a negatively charged group associated with a cationic quaternary amino group in order to maintain electronic neutrality.
  • exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F ⁇ CI “ , Br “ , ⁇ ), N0 3 ⁇ , C10 4 , OFT, H 2 P0 4 HS0 4 sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate,
  • benzenesulfonate 10-camphor sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, naphthalene- 1 -sulfonic acid-5-sulfonate, ethan-1 -sulfonic acid-2-sulfonate, and the like), and carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, ethanoate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, and the like).
  • carboxylate ions e.g., acetate, ethanoate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, and the like.
  • Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quarternary nitrogen atoms.
  • the substituent present on a nitrogen atom is a nitrogen protecting group (also referred to as an amino protecting group).
  • Nitrogen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • Nitrogen protecting groups such as carbamate groups include, but are not limited to, methyl carbamate, ethyl carbamante, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), 9-(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl carbamate, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluoroenylmethyl carbamate, 2,7-di-?-butyl-[9-(10, 10-dioxo-lO, 10, 10, 10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)] methyl carbamate (DBD- Tmoc), 4-methoxyphenacyl carbamate (Phenoc), 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (Troc), 2- trimethylsilylethyl carbamate (Teoc), 2-phenylethyl carbamate (hZ), 1 -(1-adamantyl)- 1- methyl
  • Nitrogen protecting groups such as sulfonamide groups include, but are not limited to, -toluenesulfonamide (Ts), benzenesulfonamide, 2,3,6,-trimethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtr), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtb), 2,6-dimethyl- 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Pme), 2,3,5, 6-tetramethyl ⁇ -methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mte), 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mbs), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonamide (Mts), 2,6- dimethoxy-4-methy lbenzenesulfonamide (iMds), 2,2,5,7, 8-pentamethy lchroman-6- sulfonamide (P
  • nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, phenothiazinyl-
  • diphenylphosphinamide Dpp
  • dimethylthiophosphinamide Mpt
  • diphenylthiophosphinamide Ppt
  • dialkyl phosphoramidates dibenzyl phosphoramidate, diphenyl phosphoramidate
  • benzenesulfenamide o-nitrobenzenesulfenamide (Nps)
  • 2,4-dinitrobenzenesulfenamide pentachlorobenzenesulfenamide, 2-nitro ⁇ -methoxybenzenesulfenamide
  • triphenylmethylsulfenamide triphenylmethylsulfenamide
  • 3-nitropyridinesulfenamide Npys
  • the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to as a hydroxyl protecting group).
  • Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), ?-butylthiomethyl,
  • benzisothiazolyl S,S-dioxido trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), dimethylisopropylsilyl (IPDMS), diethylisopropylsilyl (DEIPS), dimethylthexylsilyl, t- butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), ?-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), tribenzylsilyl, tri- -xylylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, diphenylmethylsilyl (DPMS), ?-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl (TBMPS), formate, benzoylformate, acetate, chloroacetate, dichloroacetate, trichloroacetate, trifluoroacetate, methoxyacetate, triphenylmethoxyacetate, phenoxyacetate, -chlorophenoxy
  • the substituent present on an sulfur atom is an sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a thiol protecting group).
  • Sulfur protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3 rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable” means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound.
  • such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts.
  • such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2 -hydroxy ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesul,
  • Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable cation refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like (see, e.g., Berge, et al, J. Pharm. Sci. 66(1): 1-79 (Jan.”77) .
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle” refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient or carrier with which a compound of the invention is administered.
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable metabolically cleavable group” refers to a group which is cleaved in vivo to yield the parent molecule of the structural Formula indicated herein.
  • Examples of metabolically cleavable groups include -COR, -COOR,-CONRR and -CH 2 OR radicals, where R is selected independently at each occurrence from alkyl, trialkylsilyl, carbocyclic aryl or carbocyclic aryl substituted with one or more of alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy.
  • Specific examples of representative metabolically cleavable groups include acetyl, methoxycarbonyl, benzoyl, methoxymethyl and trimethylsilyl groups.
  • Prodrugs refers to compounds, including derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention that are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N- alkylmorpholine esters and the like. Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but in the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985).
  • Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides.
  • Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are particular prodrugs.
  • double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or
  • ((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters Particularly the Ci to Cs alkyl, C2-C 8 alkenyl, C2-C 8 alkynyl, aryl, C7-C12 substituted aryl, and C7-C12 arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.
  • Solvate refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent or water (also referred to as "hydrate”), usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding.
  • solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid and the like.
  • the compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated.
  • Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid.
  • “Solvate” encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
  • a "subject" to which administration is contemplated includes, but is not limited to, humans (i.e., a male or female of any age group, e.g., a pediatric subject (e.g, infant, child, adolescent) or adult subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult or senior adult)) and/or a non- human animal, e.g., a mammal such as primates (e.g., cynomolgus monkeys, rhesus monkeys), cattle, pigs, horses, sheep, goats, rodents, cats, and/or dogs.
  • the subject is a human.
  • the subject is a non-human animal.
  • the terms "human", “patient” and “subject” are used interchangeably herein.
  • “Therapeutically effective amount” means the amount of a compound that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease.
  • the “therapeutically effective amount” can vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
  • Preventing refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring or developing a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject not yet exposed to a disease-causing agent, or predisposed to the disease in advance of disease onset.
  • prophylaxis is related to "prevention", and refers to a measure or procedure the purpose of which is to prevent, rather than to treat or cure a disease.
  • prophylactic measures may include the administration of vaccines; the
  • Treating” or “treatment” of any disease or disorder refers, in certain
  • treating refers to ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may not be discernible by the subject.
  • treating or
  • treatment refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom), physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter), or both.
  • “treating” or “treatment” relates to slowing the progression of the disease.
  • isotopic variant refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound.
  • an “isotopic variant” of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium ( 2 H or D), carbon-13 ( 13 C), nitrogen-15 ( 15 N), or the like.
  • non-radioactive isotopes such as for example, deuterium ( 2 H or D), carbon-13 ( 13 C), nitrogen-15 ( 15 N), or the like.
  • the following atoms, where present may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be 2 H/D, any carbon may be 13 C, or any nitrogen may be 15 N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art.
  • the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies.
  • the radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e., 3 H, and carbon-14, i.e., 14 C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection.
  • compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as n C, 18 F, 15 0 and 13 N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.
  • enantiomers and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed "enantiomers".
  • An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (-)-isomers respectively).
  • a chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a "racemic mixture".
  • Tautomers refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of ⁇ electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro- forms of phenylnitromethane, which are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base.
  • Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
  • a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess).
  • an "S" form of the compound is substantially free from the "R” form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the "R” form.
  • enantiomerically pure or “pure enantiomer” denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 98.5% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.2% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, more than 99.6% by weight, more than 99.7% by weight, more than 99.8% by weight or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer.
  • the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
  • the term “enantiomerically pure R- compound” refers to at least about 80% by weight R-compound and at most about 20% by weight S-compound, at least about 90% by weight R-compound and at most about 10% by weight S-compound, at least about 95% by weight R-compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, at least about 99% by weight R-compound and at most about 1% by weight S- compound, at least about 99.9% by weight R-compound or at most about 0.1% by weight S- compound.
  • the weights are based upon total weight of compound.
  • the term “enantiomerically pure S- compound” or “S-compound” refers to at least about 80% by weight S-compound and at most about 20% by weight R-compound, at least about 90% by weight S-compound and at most about 10% by weight R-compound, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, at least about 99% by weight S-compound and at most about 1% by weight R-compound or at least about 99.9% by weight S-compound and at most about 0.1% by weight R-compound.
  • the weights are based upon total weight of compound.
  • an enantiomerically pure compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or prodrug thereof can be present with other active or inactive ingredients.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure R-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure R-compound.
  • the enantiomerically pure R- compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight R- compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, by total weight of the compound.
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure S-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure S-compound.
  • the enantiomerically pure S-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, by total weight of the compound.
  • the active ingredient can be formulated with little or no excipient or carrier.
  • the compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as individual (R)- or (S)- stereoisomers or as mixtures thereof.
  • heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable.
  • compositions comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex.
  • the bolaamphiphile complexes comprise one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound, metal or metal alloy capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
  • novel magnetic bolavesicles comprising bolaamphiphilic compounds.
  • nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles are nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
  • novel formulations and/or novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising of complexes of magnetic nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
  • formulations and/or compositions are useful for delivering drugs or imaging agents into the brain.
  • kits for delivering drugs or imaging agents into animal or human brain comprising the step of administering to the animal or human a pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
  • the bolaamphiphilic complex comprises one bolaamphiphilic compound. In another embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic complex comprises two bolaamphiphilic compounds.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound consists of two hydrophilic headgroups linked through a long hydrophobic chain.
  • the hydrophilic headgroup is an amino containing group.
  • the hydrophilic headgroup is a tertiary or quaternary amino containing group.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula I:
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently a hydrophilic head group
  • L 1 is alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C2 0 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is a quaternary ammonium salt.
  • L 1 is heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker comprising C, N, and O atoms; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C2 0 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
  • each L 2 and L 3 is C4-C2 0 alkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-Cs alkyl or hydroxy;
  • n4 is independently an integer from 4-20.
  • each L 2 and L 3 is independently -C(R 1 )-C(OH)-CH 2 -
  • R 1 is Ci-Cs alkyl, and n7 is independently an integer from 4-20.
  • L 1 is -0-(CH 2 ) nl -0-C(0)-(CH 2 ) n2 -C(0)-0-(CH 2 ) n3 -0-.
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is independently -C(R 3 ) 2 -, -N(R 3 )- or -0-;
  • each R la , R lb , R 3 , and R 4 is independently H or Ci-C 8 alkyl
  • each R 2a and R 2b is independently H , Ci-Cs alkyl, OH, or alkoxy;
  • each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • each methylene carbon is unsubstituted or substituted with C 1 -C4 alkyl; and each nl, n2, and n3 is independently an integer from 4-20.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI:
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently a hydrophilic head group
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is independently -C(R 3 ) 2 -, -N(R 3 )- or -0-;
  • each R la , R lb , R 3 , and R 4 is independently H or Ci-C 8 alkyl
  • each R 2a and R 2b is independently H , Ci-C 8 alkyl, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG 1 or O-HG 2 ; each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • each n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 2-12. In another embodiment, n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 4-8. In a particular embodiment, each n9 and nl 1 is 7 or 1 1.
  • each n8 and nl2 is independently 1, 2, 3, or 4. In a particular embodiment, each n8 and nl2 is 1.
  • each R 2a and R 2b is independently H, OH, or alkoxy. In another embodiment, each R 2a and R 2b is independently H, OH, or OMe. In another embodiment, each R 2a and R 2b is independently-O-HG 1 or O-HG 2 . In a particular embodiment, each R 2a and R 2b is OH.
  • each R la and R lb is independently H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n- pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl.
  • each R la and R lb is independently n-pentyl.
  • each dotted bond is a single bond. In another embodiment, each dotted bond is a double bond.
  • nlO is an integer from 2-16. In another embodiment, nlO is an integer from 2- 12. In a particular embodiment, nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
  • R 4 is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl. In another embodiment, R 4 is Me, or Et. In a particular embodiment, R 4 is Me.
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is independently C(R 3 )2-, or -N(R 3 )-.
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is independently C(R 3 )2-, or -N(R 3 )-; and each R 3 is independently H, Me, Et, n- Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl.
  • R 3 is H.
  • each Z 1 and Z 2 is -0-.
  • each HG 1 and HG 2 is independently selected from:
  • X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl; each R 8 is independently
  • ml is 0 or 1
  • each nl3, nl4, and nl5 is independently an integer from 1-20.
  • HG 1 and HG 2 are as defined above, and each ml is 0.
  • HG 1 and HG 2 are as defined above, and each ml is 1.
  • HG 1 and HG 2 are as defined above, and each nl3 is 1 or 2.
  • HG 1 and HG 2 are as defined above, and each nl4 and nl5 is independently 1, 2, 3,
  • each nl4 and nl5 is independently 2 or 3.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vila, Vllb, VIIc, or Vlld:
  • each X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Villa, VHIb, VIIIc, or Vllld:
  • each X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula IXa, IXb, or IXc:
  • IXc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
  • each X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Xa, Xb, or Xc:
  • Xc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
  • each X is -NR 5a R 5b , or -N + R 5a R 5b R 5c ; each R 5a , and R 5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl or R 5a and R 5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
  • each R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C2 0 alkyl;
  • nlO is an integer from 2-20;
  • each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
  • each dotted bond is a single bond. In another embodiment, each dotted bond is a double bond.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc
  • nlO is an integer from 2-16.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc
  • nlO is an integer from 2-12.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc
  • nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
  • each R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl.
  • each R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c is independently unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl.
  • R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c is Ci-C 20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R 6 ; and R 6 is Ci-C 20 alkyl.
  • R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c are independently Ci-C 20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R 6 ; and R 6 is C1-C20 alkyl.
  • R 6 is Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl.
  • R 6 is Me.
  • R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c is Ci-C 20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
  • R 5a , R 5b , and R 5c are independently C1-C20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, R 5a , and R 5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, R 5a , and R 5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld
  • IXa-IXc or Xa-Xc
  • R 5a , and R 5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl.
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld
  • IXa-IXc Xa-Xc X is substituted or unsubstituted
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc
  • X is -NMe 2 or -N + Me 3 .
  • Vlla-VIId Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc
  • X is -N(Me)-CH 2 CH 2 -OAc or -N + (Me) 2 -CH 2 CH 2 - OAc.
  • X is a chitosanyl group; and the chitosanyl group is a poly-(D)glucosaminyl group with MW of 3800 to 20,000 Daltons, and is attached to the core via .
  • the chitosanyl group is
  • each pi and p2 is independently an integer from 1-400; and each R 7a is H or acyl.
  • each pi and p2 is independently an integer from 1-400; and each R 7a is H or acyl.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt with pharmaceutically acceptable alkyl halide or alkyl tosylate.
  • the bolaamphiphilic compound is any one of the bolaambphilic compounds listed in Table 1.
  • the bolavasicle comporises one or more bolaamphilic compounds described herein.
  • the magnetic nanoparticle or MNP is Fe 3 0 4 .
  • the magnetic nanoparticle is a class of nanoparticle which can be manipulated using magnetic field.
  • the magnetic nanoparticle comprises magnetic elements.
  • the magnetic element is iron, nickel or cobalt or their chemical compounds.
  • the magnetic nanoparticle is a metal oxide.
  • MNP is ferrite nanoparticles.
  • the surface of ferrite nanoparticles is modified by surfactants, silicones or phosphoric acid derivatives to increase their stability in solution.
  • the magnetic nanoparticle is metallic nanoparticle.
  • the metallic core of the metallic nanoparticle is passivated by gentle oxidation, surfactants, polymers and precious metals.
  • the magnetic nanoparticle is a CoO nanoparticle.
  • Co nanoparticles form an anti- ferromagnetic CoO layer on the surface of the Co nanoparticle.
  • work has explored the synthesis and exchange bias effect in these Co core CoO shell nanoparticles with a gold outer shell.
  • Nanoparticles with a magnetic core consisting either of elementary Iron or Cobalt with a nonreactive shell made of graphene have been synthesized recently.[13]
  • the advantages compared to ferrite or elemental nanoparticles are higher magnetization and higher stability in acidic and basic solution as well as organic solvents.
  • the syntheses can involve initial construction of, for example, vernonia oil or direct functionalization of natural derivatives by organic synthesis manipulations such as, but not limiting to, epoxide ring opening.
  • organic synthesis manipulations such as, but not limiting to, epoxide ring opening.
  • the epoxy group is opened by the addition of reagents such as carboxylic acids or organic or inorganic nucleophiles.
  • Such ring opening results in a mixture of two products in which the new group is introduced at either of the two carbon atoms of the epoxide moiety.
  • This provides beta substituted alcohols in which the substitution position most remote from the CO group of the main aliphatic chain of the vernonia oil derivative is arbitrarily assigned as position 1, while the neighboring substituted carbon position is designated position 2.
  • the Derivatives and Precursors shown herein may indicate structures with the hydroxy group always at position 2 but the Derivatives and Precursors wherein the hydroxy is at position 1 are also encompassed by the invention.
  • a radical of the formula— CH(OH)— CH(R)— refers to the substitution of—OH at either the carbon closer to the CO group, designated position 2 or to the carbon at position 1.
  • vesicles are prepared using the mixture of unfractionated positional isomers.
  • the bola used in vesicle preparation can actually be a mixture of three different positional isomers.
  • the three different derivatives are isolated. Accordingly, the vesicles disclosed herein can be made from a mixture of the three isomers of each derivative or, in other embodiments, the individual isomers can be isolated and used for preparation of vesicles.
  • Symmetrical bolaamphiphiles can form relatively stable self aggregate vesicle structures by the use of additives such as cholesterol and cholesterol derivatives (e.g., cholesterol hemisuccinate, cholesterol oleyl ether, anionic and cationic derivatives of cholesterol and the like), or other additives including single headed amphiphiles with one, two or multiple aliphatic chains such as phospholipids, zwitterionic, acidic, or cationic lipids.
  • zwitterionic lipids are phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanol amines and sphingomyelins.
  • Examples of acidic amphiphilic lipids are phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidylserines, phosphatidylinositols, and phosphatidic acids.
  • Examples of cationic amphipathic lipids are diacyl trimethylammonium propanes, diacyl dimethylammonium propanes, and stearylamines cationic amphiphiles such as spermine cholesterol carbamates, and the like, in optimum concentrations which fill in the larger spaces on the outer surfaces, and/or add additional hydrophilicity to the particles.
  • Such additives may be added to the reaction mixture during formation of nanoparticles to enhance stability of the nanoparticles by filling in the void volumes of in the upper surface of the vesicle membrane.
  • Stability of nano vesicles according to the present disclosure can be demonstrated by dynamic light scattering (DLS) and transmission electron microscopy (TEM).
  • DLS dynamic light scattering
  • TEM transmission electron microscopy
  • suspensions of the vesicles can be left to stand for 1, 5, 10, and 30 days to assess the stability of the nanoparticle solution/suspension and then analyzed by DLS and TEM.
  • the vesicles disclosed herein may encapsulate within their core the active agent, which in particular embodiments is selected from peptides, proteins, nucleotides and or non- polymeric agents.
  • the active agent is also associated via one or more non-covalent interactions to the vesicular membrane on the outer surface and/or the inner surface, optionally as pendant decorating the outer or inner surface, and may further be incorporated into the membrane surrounding the core.
  • biologically active peptides, proteins, nucleotides or non-polymeric agents that have a net electric charge may associate ionically with oppositely charged headgroups on the vesicle surface and/or form salt complexes therewith.
  • additives which may be used in particular aspects of these embodiments, additives which may be used in particular.
  • bolaamphiphiles or single headed amphiphiles comprise one or more branching alkyl chains bearing polar or ionic pendants, wherein the aliphatic portions act as anchors into the vesicle's membrane and the pendants (e.g., chitosan derivatives or polyamines or certain peptides) decorate the surface of the vesicle to enhance penetration through various biological barriers such as the intestinal tract and the BBB, and in some instances are also selectively hydrolyzed at a given site or within a given organ.
  • the concentration of these additives is readily adjusted according to experimental determination.
  • the oral formulations of the present disclosure comprise agents that enhance penetration through the membranes of the GI tract and enable passage of intact nanoparticles containing the drug.
  • agents may be any of the additives mentioned above and, in particular aspects of these embodiment, include chitosan and derivatives thereof, serving as vehicle surface ligands, as decorations or pendants on the vesicles, or the agents may be excipients added to the formulation.
  • the nanoparticles and vesicles disclosed herein may comprise the fluorescent marker carboxyfluorescein (CF) encapsulated therein while in particular aspects, the nanoparticle and vesicles of the present disclosure may be decorated with one or more of PEG, e.g.
  • PEG2000-vernonia derivatives as pendants.
  • PEG- vernonia derivatives two kinds can be used: PEG-ether derivatives, wherein PEG is bound via an ether bond to the oxygen of the opened epoxy ring of, e.g., vernolic acid and PEG-ester derivatives, wherein PEG is bound via an ester bond to the carboxylic group of, e.g., vernolic acid.
  • vesicles made from synthetic amphiphiles, as well as liposomes, made from synthetic or natural phospholipids, substantially (or totally) isolate the therapeutic agent from the environment allowing each vesicle or liposome to deliver many molecules of the therapeutic agent.
  • the surface properties of the vesicle or liposome can be modified for biological stability, enhanced penetration through biological barriers and targeting, independent of the physico-chemical properties of the encapsulated drug.
  • the headgroup is selected from: (i) choline or thiocholine, O-alkyl, N-alkyl or ester derivatives thereof; (ii) non-aromatic amino acids with functional side chains such as glutamic acid, aspartic acid, lysine or cysteine, or an aromatic amino acid such as tyrosine, tryptophan, phenylalanine and derivatives thereof such as levodopa (3, 4-dihydroxy -phenylalanine) and p-aminophenylalanine; (iii) a peptide or a peptide derivative that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme at a diseased site selected from enkephalin, N-acetyl- ala-ala, a peptide that constitutes a domain recognized by beta and gamma secretases, and a peptide that is recognized by stromelysins; (iv) saccharides such as glucose, man
  • nano-sized particle and vesicles disclosed herein further comprise at least one additive for one or more of targeting purposes, enhancing permeability and increasing the stability the vesicle or particle.
  • additives may selected from from: (i) a single headed amphiphilic derivative comprising one, two or multiple aliphatic chains, preferably two aliphatic chains linked to a midsection/spacer region such as— H— (CH 2 ) 2 ⁇ N ⁇ (CH 2 ) 2 ⁇ N ⁇ , or ⁇ 0 ⁇ (CH 2 ) 2 ⁇ N ⁇ (CH 2 ) 2 ⁇ 0 ⁇ , and a sole headgroup, which may be a selectively cleavable headgroup or one containing a polar or ionic selectively cleavable group or moiety, attached to the N atom in the middle of said midsection.
  • the additive can be selected from among cholesterol and cholesterol derivatives such as cholesteryl hemmisuccinate; phospholipids, zwitterionic, acidic, or cationic lipids; chitosan and chitosan derivatives, such as vernolic acid-chitosan conjugate, quaternized chitosan, chitosan- polyethylene glycol (PEG) conjugates, chitosan-polypropylene glycol (PPG) conjugates, chitosan N-conjugated with different amino acids, carboxyalkylated chitosan, sulfonyl chitosan, carbohydrate-branched N-(carboxymethylidene) chitosan and N-(carboxymethyl) chitosan;
  • cholesterol and cholesterol derivatives such as cholesteryl hemmisuccinate
  • polyamines such as protamine, polylysine or polyarginine
  • ligands of specific receptors at a target site of a biological environment such as nicotine, cytisine, lobeline, 1 -glutamic acid MK801, morphine, enkephalins, benzodiazepines such as diazepam (valium) and librium, dopamine agonists, dopamine antagonists tricyclic antidepressants, muscarinic agonists, muscarinic antagonists, cannabinoids and arachidonyl ethanol amide
  • polycationic polymers such as polyethylene amine
  • peptides that enhance transport through the BBB such as OX 26, transferrins, polybrene, histone, cationic dendrimer, synthetic peptides and polymyxin B nonapeptide (PMBN)
  • monosaccharides such as glucose, mannose, ascorbic acid and derivatives thereof
  • the aforementioned head groups on the additives designed for one or more of targeting purposes and enhancing permeability may also be a head group, preferably on an asymmetric bolaamphiphile wherein the other head group is another moiety, or the head group on both sides of a symmetrical bolaamphiphile.
  • the bolaamphiphile head groups that comprise the vesicles membranes can interact with the active agents to be encapsulated to be delivered in to the brain and brain sites, and or other targeted sites, by ionic interactions to enhance the % encapsulation via complexation and well as passive encapsulation within the vesicles core.
  • the formulation may contain other additives within the vehicles membranes to further enhance the degree of encapsulation of the active agents by interactions other than ionic interactions such as polar or hydrophobic interactions.
  • nano-sized particle and vesicles discloser herein may comprises at least one biologically active agent is selected from: (i) a natural or synthetic peptide or protein such as analgesics peptides from the enkephalin class, insulin, insulin analogs, oxytocin, calcitonin, tyrotropin releasing hormone, follicle stimulating hormone, luteinizing hormone, vasopressin and vasopressin analogs, catalase, interleukin-II, interferon, colony stimulating factor, tumor necrosis factor (TNF), melanocyte-stimulating hormone, superoxide dismutase, glial cell derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) or the Gly-Leu-Phe (GLF) families; (ii) nucleosides and polynucleotides selected from DNA or RNA molecules such as small interfering RNA (siRNA) or a DNA plasmid; (iii) antivir
  • the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or a complex thereof.
  • compositions When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds provided herein are typically administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Such compositions can be prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • the carrier is a parenteral carrier, oral or topical carrier.
  • the present invention also relates to a compound or pharmaceutical composition of compound according to Formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof for use as a pharmaceutical or a medicament.
  • the compounds provided herein are administered in a therapeutically effective amount.
  • the amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • compositions provided herein can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal.
  • routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal.
  • the compounds provided herein are preferably formulated as either injectable or oral compositions or as salves, as lotions or as patches all for transdermal administration.
  • compositions for oral administration can take the form of bulk liquid solutions or suspensions, or bulk powders. More commonly, however, the compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • Typical unit dosage forms include prefilled, premeasured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions or pills, tablets, capsules or the like in the case of solid compositions.
  • the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1 to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1 to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or carriers and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
  • Liquid forms suitable for oral administration may include a suitable aqueous or nonaqueous vehicle with buffers, suspending and dispensing agents, colorants, flavors and the like.
  • Solid forms may include, for example, any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
  • a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin
  • an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch
  • Injectable compositions are typically based upon injectable sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline or other injectable carriers known in the art.
  • the active compound in such compositions is typically a minor component, often being from about 0.05 to 10% by weight with the remainder being the injectable carrier and the like.
  • Transdermal compositions are typically formulated as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s), generally in an amount ranging from about 0.01 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight, and more preferably from about 0.5 to about 15% by weight.
  • the active ingredients When formulated as a ointment, the active ingredients will typically be combined with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with, for example an oil-in-water cream base.
  • Such transdermal formulations are well-known in the art and generally include additional ingredients to enhance the dermal penetration of stability of the active ingredients or the formulation. All such known transdermal formulations and ingredients are included within the scope provided herein.
  • the compounds provided herein can also be administered by a transdermal device.
  • transdermal administration can be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir or porous membrane type, or of a solid matrix variety.
  • the compounds of this invention can also be administered in sustained release forms or from sustained release drug delivery systems.
  • sustained release materials can be found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences.
  • the present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable formulations of compounds of Formula I.
  • the formulation comprises water.
  • the formulation comprises a cyclodextrin derivative.
  • the formulation comprises hexapropyl-P-cyclodextrin.
  • the formulation comprises hexapropyl-P-cyclodextrin (10-50% in water).
  • the present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of compounds of Formula I.
  • the acids which are used to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable salts are those which form non-toxic acid addition salts, i.e. salts containing pharmacologically acceptable aniovs such as the hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, hosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, tartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, benzoate, para-toluenesulfonate, and the like.
  • a compound of the invention may be dissolved or suspended in a buffered sterile saline injectable aqueous medium to a concentration of approximately 5 mg/mL.
  • Bolaamphiphilic vesicles may have certain advantages over conventional liposomes as potential vehicles for drug delivery.
  • Bolavesicles have thinner membranes than comparable liposomal bilayer, and therefore possess bigger inner volume and hence higher encapsulation capacity than liposomes of the same diameter.
  • Bolavesicles have thinner membranes than comparable liposomal bilayer, and therefore possess bigger inner volume and hence higher encapsulation capacity than liposomes of the same diameter.
  • bolavesicles are more physically-stable than conventional liposomes, but can be destabilized in a triggered fashion (e.g., by hydrolysis of the headgroups using a specific enzymatic reaction) thus allowing controlled release of the encapsulated material at the site of action (i.e., drug targeting) 8 .
  • the inventors find that the new hybrid magnetic vesicles exhibit more pronounced membrane interactions and more effective uptake into brain endothelial cells compared to non-magnetic bolavesicles counterparts, underscoring the potential of magnetic bolavesicles as a new vehicle for brain- targeted drug delivery and diagnostics.
  • the compounds provided herein may be isolated and purified by known standard procedures. Such procedures include (but are not limited to) recrystallization, column chromatography or HPLC. The following schemes are presented with details as to the preparation of representative substituted biarylamides that have been listed herein.
  • the compounds provided herein may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
  • the enantiomerically pure compounds provided herein may be prepared according to any techniques known to those of skill in the art. For instance, they may be prepared by chiral or asymmetric synthesis from a suitable optically pure precursor or obtained from a racemate by any conventional technique, for example, by chromatographic resolution using a chiral column, TLC or by the preparation of diastereoisomers, separation thereof and regeneration of the desired enantiomer. See, e.g., "Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions," by J. Jacques, A. Collet, and S.H. Wilen, (Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1981); S.H. Wilen, A. Collet, and J.
  • an enantiomerically pure compound of formula (1) may be obtained by reaction of the racemate with a suitable optically active acid or base.
  • suitable acids or bases include those described in Bighley et ah, 1995, Salt Forms of Drugs and
  • Enantiomerically pure compounds can also be recovered either from the crystallized diastereomer or from the mother liquor, depending on the solubility properties of the particular acid resolving agent employed and the particular acid enantiomer used.
  • the identity and optical purity of the particular compound so recovered can be determined by polarimetry or other analytical methods known in the art.
  • the diasteroisomers can then be separated, for example, by chromatography or fractional crystallization, and the desired enantiomer regenerated by treatment with an appropriate base or acid.
  • the other enantiomer may be obtained from the racemate in a similar manner or worked up from the liquors of the first separation.
  • enantiomerically pure compound can be separated from racemic compound by chiral chromatography.
  • Various chiral columns and eluents for use in the separation of the enantiomers are available and suitable conditions for the separation can be empirically determined by methods known to one of skill in the art.
  • Exemplary chiral columns available for use in the separation of the enantiomers provided herein include, but are not limited to CHIRALCEL® OB, CHIRALCEL® OB-H, CHIRALCEL® OD, CHIRALCEL® OD-H, CHIRALCEL® OF, CHIRALCEL® OG, CHIRALCEL® OJ and CHIRALCEL® OK.
  • BBB blood brain barrier
  • BCECs brain capillary endothelial cells
  • GUVs giant unilamellar vesicles
  • Bolaamphiphile synthesis [00224]
  • the boloamphiphles or bolaamphiphilic compounds of the invention can be synthesized following the procedures described previously 5 ' 6 .
  • the carboxylic group of methyl vernolate or vernolic acid was interacted with aliphatic diols to obtain bisvernolesters.
  • the epoxy group of the vernolate moiety located on C12 and CI 3 of the aliphatic chain of vernolic acid, was used to introduce two ACh headgroups on the two vicinal carbons obtained after the opening of the oxirane ring.
  • the ACh head group was attached to the vernolate skeleton through the nitrogen atom of the choline moiety.
  • the bolaamphiphile was prepared in a two-stage synthesis: First, opening of the epoxy ring with a haloacetic acid and, second, quaternization with the N,N- dimethylamino ethyl acetate.
  • the bolaamphiphile was prepared in a three-stage synthesis, including opening of the epoxy ring with glutaric acid, then esterification of the free carboxylic group with N,N-dimethyl amino ethanol and the final product was obtained by quaternization of the head group, using methyl iodide followed by exchange of the iodide ion by chloride using an ion exchange resin.
  • Each bolaamphiphile was characterized by mass spectrometry, NMR and IR spectroscopy. The purity of the two bolaamphiphiles was >97% as determined by HPLC.
  • Iron(III) acetylacetonate (Fe(acac) 3 ), diphenyl ether, 1,2- hexadecanediol, oleic acid, oleylamine, and carboxyfluorescein (CF) were purchased from Sigma Aldrich (Rehovot, Israel). Chloroform and ethanol were purchased from Bio-Lab Ltd. Jerusalem, Israel.
  • DMPG 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn- glycero-3-phospho-(l'-rac-glycerol)
  • DMPE 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
  • DMPG 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine
  • DMPC diacetylenic monomer 10,12- tricosadiynoic acid
  • CHEMS cholesteryl hemisuccinate
  • the diacetylenic monomer 10,12- tricosadiynoic acid was purchased from Alfa Aesar (Karlsruhe, Germany), and purified by dissolving the powder in chloroform, filtering the resulting solution through a 0.45 ⁇ nylon filter (Whatman Inc., Clifton, NJ, USA), and evaporation of the solvent.
  • l-(4 trimethylammoniumphenyl)-6-phenyl- 1,3,5- hexatriene (TMA-DPH) was purchased from Molecular Probes Inc. (Eugene, OR, USA).
  • the synthesis bolaamphiphilic compounds of this invention can be carried out in accordance with the methods described previously (Chemistry and Physics of Lipids 2008, 153, 85-97; Journal of Liposome Research 2010, 20, 147-59; WO2002/05501 1; WO2003/047499; or WO2010/128504) and using the appropriate reagents, starting materials, and purification methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • Several representative bolaamphiphilic compounds of the invention, which are prepared in according the methods described herein or can be prepared following the methods described in the literature or following the methods known to those skilled in the art, are given in Table 1.
  • EPR Electron paramagnetic resonance
  • EPR spectra of MNPs or of the MNPs-embedded bolavesicles resuspended in PBS were obtained using a Bruker EMX-220 X-band ( ⁇ 9.4 GHz) EPR spectrometer equipped with an Oxford Instruments ESR 900 temperature accessories and an Agilent 53150A frequency counter. Spectra were recorded at room temperature with the non-saturating incident microwave power 20 mW and the 100 KHz magnetic field modulation of 0.2 mT amplitude. Processing of EPR spectra, determination of spectral parameters were done using Bruker WI -EPR software.
  • Specimens studied by cryo-TEM were prepared. Sample solutions (4 ⁇ ) were deposited on a glow discharged, 300 mesh, lacey carbon copper grids (Ted Pella, Redding, CA, USA). The excess liquid was blotted and the specimen was vitrified in a Leica EM GP vitrification system in which the temperature and relative humidity are controlled. The samples were examined at -180 °C using a FEI Tecnai 12 G2 TWIN TEM equipped with a Gatan 626 cold stage, and the images were recorded (Gatan model 794 charge-coupled device camera) at 120 kV in low-dose mode.
  • Lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles (PDA/DMPC 3:2, mole ratio) were prepared by dissolving the lipid components in chloroform/ ethanol and drying together in vacuo. Vesicles were subsequently prepared in DDW by probe-sonication of the aqueous mixture at 70°C for 3 min. The vesicle samples were then cooled at room temperature for an hour and kept at 4°C overnight. The vesicles were then polymerized using irradiation at 254 nm for 10-20 s, with the resulting emulsions exhibiting an intense blue appearance.
  • PDA fluorescence was measured in 96-well microplates (Greiner Bio-One GmbH, Frickenhausen, Germany) on a Fluoroscan Ascent fluorescence plate reader (Thermo Vantaa, Finland). All measurements were performed at room temperature at 485 nm excitation and 555 nm emission using LP filters with normal slits. Acquisition of data was automatically performed every 5 min for 60 min. Samples comprised 30 ⁇ , of DMPC/PDA vesicles and 5 ⁇ , bolaamphiphilic vesicles assembled with MNPs, followed by addition of 30 ⁇ . 50 mM Tris-base buffer (pH 8.0).
  • Fi is the fluorescence emission of the lipid/PDA vesicles after addition of the tested membrane-active compounds
  • Fo is the fluorescence of the control sample (without addition of the compounds)
  • Fioo is the fluorescence of a sample heated to produce the highest fluorescence emission of the red PDA phase minus the fluorescence of the control sample.
  • Lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles (PDA/DMPC 3:2, mole ratio) were prepared by dissolving the lipid components in chloroform/ ethanol and drying together in vacuo. Vesicles were subsequently prepared in DDW by probe-sonication of the aqueous mixture at 70°C for 3 min. The vesicle samples were then cooled at room temperature for an hour and kept at 4°C overnight. The vesicles were then polymerized using irradiation at 254 nm for 10-20 s, with the resulting emulsions exhibiting an intense blue appearance.
  • PDA fluorescence was measured in 96-well microplates (Greiner Bio-One GmbH, Frickenhausen, Germany) on a Fluoroscan Ascent fluorescence plate reader (Thermo Vantaa, Finland). All measurements were performed at room temperature at 485 nm excitation and 555 nm emission using LP filters with normal slits. Acquisition of data was automatically performed every 5 min for 60 min. Samples comprised 30 ⁇ ⁇ of DMPC/PDA vesicles and 5 ⁇ 1 ⁇ bolaamphiphilic vesicles assembled with MNPs, followed by addition of 30 ⁇ , 50 mM Tris-base buffer (pH 8.0).
  • b.End3 immortalized mouse brain capillary endothelium cells were kindly provided by Prof. Philip Lazarovici (Institute for Drug Research, School of Pharmacy, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel).
  • the b.End3 cells were cultured in DMEM medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-Glutamine, 100 IU/mL penicillin and 100 ⁇ g/mL streptomycin (Biological Industries Ltd., Beit Haemek, Israel).
  • the cells were maintained in an incubator at 37°C in a humidified atmosphere with 5% CO 2 .
  • b.End3 cells were grown on 24-well plates or on coverslips (for FACS and fluorescence microscopy analysis, respectively). The medium was replaced with culture medium without serum and CF solution, or tested bolavesicles (equivalent to 0.5 ⁇ g/mL CF), or equivalent volume of the medium were added to the cells and incubated for 5 hr at 4°C or at 37°C.
  • b.End3 cells were grown on 24-well plates, after 24 hr, the medium was replaced with culture medium without serum and CF solution, or studied bolavesicles (equivalent to 0.5 ⁇ g/mL CF), or equivalent volume of the medium were added to the cells and incubated for 5 hr in an incubator at 37°C in a humidified atmosphere with 5% CO 2 . At the end of the incubation period, the cells were washed with growth medium and with PBS. The nucleus was stained with 4',6- diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI, KPL Ltd., MD, USA; 100 ⁇ g/mL in PBS).
  • DAPI 4',6- diamidino-2-phenylindole
  • the cells were detached from the plates using Trypsin-EDTA solution and washed again with PBS.
  • Live imaging was performed using a Zeiss LSM 510-NLO system with an Axiovert 200M inverted microscope (Carl Zeiss Inc., Germany) tuned to 405 nm and 63x 1.4 NA Zeiss Plan- Apochromat oil immersion objective. Videos were recorded without a magnet, and with a magnet placed on different sides of the well.
  • bolaamphiphiles Two representative bolaamphiphiles, GLH-19 and GLH-20 (Table 1) were used in this study. Both compounds have cationic headgroups derived from acetylcholine (ACh): GLH- 20 that can be cleaved by the cholinesterase enzymes, and GLH-19 that is not cleavable by these enzymes. These two bolaamphiphiles can form spherical vesicles that deliver encapsulated markers across biological barriers such as the cell membrane 8 and the blood-brain barrier 6 .
  • ACh acetylcholine
  • the inventors compared these two bolaamphiphiles for their ability to deliver encapsulated nanoparticles across the cell membrane with the thought of determining which of these two bolaamphiphile may be more adequate to deliver encapsulated nanoparticle into the brain for imaging or treatment purposes.
  • Table 2 depicts bolavesicle size distributions (with and without embedded MNPs) determined by dynamic light scattering (DLS), and the respective zeta potential values of the prepared vesicles.
  • Table 1 indicates that the MNPs co-assembled with the bolaamphiphiles and lipids did not significantly modify vesicle size. However, in both types of bolavesicles
  • MNPs (comprising of GLH-19 and GLH-20 bolaamphiphiles, respectively) inclusion of MNPs reduced the zeta-potential, suggesting that association of the MNPs reduced the exposure of the positive surface charge, likely due to reorganization of the lipids/bolaamphiphile constituents.
  • Cryogenic -transmission electron microscopy (cryo-TEM) experiments further highlight the structural properties of the magnetic bolavesicles (Figure IB).
  • the representative cryo-TEM images in Figure IB reveal distinct distributions of the MNPs in the vesicles, depending on the bolaamphiphile composition.
  • the MNPs appear to localize close to the vesicle interface, with some MNPs present outside of the bolavesicle ( Figure IB).
  • Figure IB shows encapsulation of the MNPs inside the GLH-20 bolavesicles.
  • the distinct MNP/bolavesicle associations most likely reflect the different chemical structures of the bolaamphiphiles.
  • the positively-charged choline moiety in GLH-19 is located at the tip of the alkyl side-chain (Table 1).
  • the repulsion between the positive groups at the vesicle interface might allow the hydrophobic MNPs to penetrate and reside within the bolaamphiphile layer, as depicted in Figure IB.
  • the choline is located further down in the bolaamphiphile alkyl chain (Table 1), resulting in a more condensed bolaaphiphile layer.
  • the MNPs appear to be localized inside the bolavesicle core rather than inside the bolaamphiphile monolayer.
  • EPR spectra of aqueous solutions containing the control MNPs not associated with bolavesicles consist of an intense, slightly asymmetric signal characteristic of superparamagnetic single-domain NPs 17 .
  • Association of the MNPs with the bolavesicles resulted in significant modulation of the EPR spectra ( Figure 1C, solid traces).
  • the EPR spectra acquired for the MNP/bolavesicles are noticeably broadened, ascribed to inter-particle distance which is not kinetically-averaged, due to embedding of the MNPs in the bolavesicles.
  • Figure 2A depicts a kinetic experiment in which the magnetic bolavesicles were incubated with biomimetic lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles 18 .
  • the lipid/PDA vesicle platform has been s ho wn to mimic lipid bilayer systems, providing spectroscopic means for monitoring bilayer interactions of membrane-active species 19 ' 20 .
  • the PDA domains in lipi d/PDA vesicles undergo dramatic colorimetric and fluorescence transformations upon binding of substances to the vesicle bilayer, making lipid/PDA assemblies a sensitive sensor of membrane interaction 21 .
  • the PDA fluorescence emission data in Figure 2A also underscore differences in membrane interactions between the free (non-magnetic) bolavesicles and bolavesicles embedding MNPs. Specifically, in both bolavesicle formulations (GLH-19 and GLH-20), the presence of the MNPs significantly promoted bilayer interactions and corresponding higher PDA fluorescence (broken curves in Figure 2A). This effect was particularly dramatic in case of GLH-19 - for which the inclusion of MNPs induced significantly more rapid and higher fluorescence intensity (top broken curve in Figure 2A).
  • TMA-DPH trimethylammonium-diphenylhexatriene fluorescence dye
  • Figure 2B shows a marked decrease in anisotropy when the DPH-containing GUVs were incubated with GLH-19 bolavesicles as compared to the GLH-20 bolavesicles.
  • the lower fluorescence anisotropy is indicative of higher mobility of the DPH dye, brought about by binding and disruption of the lipid bilayer 24 .
  • This result echoes the PDA assay data ( Figure 2A) pointing to significantly greater bilayer disruption by the GLH-19 bolavesicles as compared to the GLH-20 bolavesicles.
  • Figure 4 demonstrates that after 5 hr incubation almost all CF fluorescence is dispersed inside the cells, originating from the endocytosed material, with no significant fluorescence identified at the cell membrane.
  • the endocytosis of GLH-20-based bolavesicles after 5 hr is not complete, with a substantial number of (magnetic and non-magnetic) bolavesicles associated with the cell membranes (apparent as the punctuated green staining).
  • Figure 4 Another noteworthy result in Figure 4 is the different distribution pattern of the fluorescent CF marker inside the b.End3 cells.
  • the fluorescent CF marker inside the b.End3 cells.
  • diffuse green staining is observed, indicating intracellular disintegration of the vesicles following their uptake by the cells.
  • a significant number of the endocytosed GLH-20- based magnetic bolavesicles were still intact, as can be seen from the mixed (diffuse + punctuated) pattern of the green CF fluorescence in the cells.
  • Gabathuler, R. Approaches to transport therapeutic drugs across the blood-brain barrier to treat brain diseases. Neurobiology of Disease 2010, 37, 48-57.
  • Stepensky D. Delivery of proteins to the brain by bolaamphiphilic nano-sized vesicles. Journal of Controlled Release 2012, 160, 315-21.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Nanotechnology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Ceramic Engineering (AREA)
  • Inorganic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Oil, Petroleum & Natural Gas (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)

Abstract

Bolaamphiphilic compounds are provided according to formula (I): where HG1, HG2 and L1 are as defined herein. Provided bolaamphilphilic compounds and the pharmaceutical compositions thereof are useful for delivering imaging agents into animal or human brain.

Description

BOLAAMPHIPHILIC COMPOUNDS, COMPOSITIONS AND USES THEREOF
FIELD
[0001] Provided herein are bolaamphiphilic compounds, complexes thereof with magnetic nanoparticles, and pharmaceutical compositions thereof. Also provided are methods of delivering magnetic nanoparticles encapsulated in bolavesicles into human and animals and targeting the nanoparticles to specific sites within the body, particularly the brain and to distict regions of the brain. This is done using the compounds, complexes and pharmaceutical compositions provided herein.
BACKGROUND
[0002] Magnetic nanoparticles may be used for imaging and for control drug delivery.
With respect to imaging, magnetic nanoparticles can emit signals when under magnetic fields or other imaging apparatuses. Magnetic particles when exposed to alternating magnetic field (AMF) emit heat that can be used to disrupt nanoparticles that contain the drug, thus releasing drugs which are encapsulated together with the magnetic particles in vesicles or liposomes. For both imaging and drug delivery the magnetic particles should be delivered to the patient and be accessible to a variety of tissues, particularly sites within the body where the disease is localized or where the drug induces its therapeutic action. Accessibility to tissues may require that the magnetic particles will cross biological barriers. The brain is an example of an organ with limited accessibility.
[0003] The brain is a highly specialized organ, and its sensitive components and functioning are protected by a barrier known as the blood-brain barrier (BBB). The brain capillary endothelial cells (BCECs) that form the BBB play important role in brain physiology by maintaining selective permeability and preventing passage of various compounds from the blood into the brain1. One consequence of the highly effective barrier properties of the BBB is the limited penetration of therapeutic agents into the brain, which makes treatment of many brain diseases extremely challenging2.
[0004] Complexation of the anionic carboxyfluorescein (CF) with single headed amphiphiles of opposite charge in cationic vesicles, formed by mixing single-tailed cationic and anionic surfactants has been reported (Danoff et al. 2007).
[0005] Furthermore, WO 02/05501 1 and WO 03/047499, both of the same applicant, disclose amphiphilic derivatives composed of at least one fatty acid chain derived from natural vegetable oils such as vernonia oil, lesquerella oil and castor oil, in which functional groups such as epoxy, hydroxy and double bonds were modified into polar and ionic headgroups.
[0006] Additionally, WO 10/128504 discloses a series of amphiphiles and
bolamphiphiles (amphiphiles with two head groups) useful for targeted drug delivery of insulin, insulin analogs, TNF, GDNF, DNA, RNA (including siRNA), enkephalin class of analgesics, and others.
[0007] These bolaamphiphiles are a unique class of compounds that have two hydrophilic headgroups placed at each ends of a hydrophobic domain. Bolaamphiphiles can form vesicles that consist of monolayer membrane that surrounds an aqueous core3. Vesicles made from natural bolaamphiphiles, such as those extracted from archaebacteria (archaesomes), are very stable and, therefore, might be employed for targeted drug delivery4. However, bolaamphiphiles from archaebacteria are heterogeneous and cannot be easily extracted or chemically synthesized.
[0008] For the purpose of targeted drug delivery, magnetic nanoparticles (MNPs) have attracted significant interest in recent years9. Various approaches have been developed for the use of MNPs in biomedical applications, for example binding pharmaceutical substances to MNPs and their targeting to the desired organs or body regions by means of a magnetic field10. In addition, MNPs displaying recognition elements can be used for targeted diagnostics through the use of magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) technologies11 13. In biomedicine, MNPs exhibit some attractive properties: they can be easily visualized using microscopy techniques, are spatially controlled while inside the human body by external (or internal implanted) magnetic fields that are considered physiologically safe. Furthermore, MNPs can be heated by an alternating magnetic field to trigger drug release or to produce local hyperthermia/ablation14.
[0009] A number of groups have developed techniques for the synthesis of "magneto- liposomes" - core-shell structures in which a magnetic iron oxide core is coated by artificial lipid bilayers15. However, in vivo experiments and clinical applications of liposome-embedded MNPs were generally disappointing. One problem is disintegration of the magneto-liposomes and dangerous accumulation of the MNPs in blood vessels16. Additionally, the liver disposition of the particles can be substantial and can lead to toxic side effects14.
[0010] Thus, there remains a need to make MNP delivery systems which can have desired characteristic for either drug delivery and or diagnostic purposes. These MNP delivery systems, their compositions, and methods of preparation are described herein are directed toward this end.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION [0011] In certain aspects, provided herein are pharmaceutical compositions comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex.
[0012] In certain aspects, the bolaamphiphile complexes comprise one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
[0013] In further aspects, provided herein are novel magnetic bolavesicles comprising bolaamphiphilic compounds.
[0014] In further aspects, provided herein are novel formulations of magnetic
nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
[0015] In another aspect, provided here are methods of delivering drugs or imaging agents into animal or human brain comprising the step of administering to the animal or human a pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound, metal, or an alloy capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
[0016] In one embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound consists of two hydrophilic headgroups linked through a long hydrophobic chain. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic headgroup comprises an amino containing group. In a specific embodiment, the hydrophilic headgroup is a tertiary or quaternary amino containing group.
[0017] In one particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula I:
HG2 L1 HG1
I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group; and
L1 is alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
[0018] In one embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is a quaternary ammonium salt.
[0019] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI:
Figure imgf000006_0001
Figure imgf000006_0002
Figure imgf000006_0003
IV
Figure imgf000006_0004
V , or
Figure imgf000006_0005
VI
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group;
each Z1 and Z2 is independently -C(R3)2-, -N(R3)- or -0-;
each Rla, Rlb, R3, and R4 is independently H or Ci-C8 alkyl;
each R2a and R2b is independently H , Ci-C8 alkyl, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG1 or O-HG2; each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[0020] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, IV, V, or VI, each HG1 and HG2 is independently selected from:
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein:
X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl; each R8 is independently
H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl, alkoxy, or carboxy;
ml is 0 or 1; and
each nl3, nl4, and nl5 is independently an integer from 1-20.
[0021] Other objects and advantages will become apparent to those skilled in the art from a consideration of the ensuing detailed description.
FIGURES
[0022] Figure 1 : Magnetic bolavesicle characterization. A. Cryo-TEM image of the prepared MNPs. Scale bar 20 nm; B. Cryo-TEM images of bolavesicles. Left: without MNPs; right: with embedded MNPs. Scale bar 50 nm; C. Electron paramagnetic resonance (EPR) spectra of free MNPs (not associated with bolavesicles; dotted lines), and MNPs incubated with bolavesicles (solid lines).
[0023] Figure 2: Bolavesicle interactions with model membranes. A. Lipid/PDA assay.
PDA fluorescence emission (excitation 485 nm, emission 540 nm) following incubation of bolavesicles with DMPC/PDA vesicles. B. Fluorescence anisotropy of DPH- TMA/DMPE/DMPG GUVs with bolavesicles (10 mg/ml). Values are means + SD of two experiments (n=2). Significant differences between the control and the studied formulations were analyzed using ANOVA followed by a Dunnett post-test: * - P<0.05, ** - PO.001.
[0024] Figure 3: b.End3 cell uptake of bolavesicles analyzed by FACS. The cells were o o incubated with the studied vesicles or with the control solutions for 5 hr at 4 C (left) or at 37 C (right). At the end of the incubation the cells were extensively washed and analyzed by FACS.
[0025] Figure 4: Intracellular CF transport by bolavesicles. Intracellular localization and fate of magnetic and non-magnetic bolavesicles, respectively, in b.End3 cells. The cells were incubated with the bolavesicles or with the control solutions for 5 h at 37°C. At the end of the incubation the cells were extensively washed, stained with nuclear stain (DAPI) and analyzed using confocal microscopy. Left column: DAPI fluorescence; Middle column: CF fluorescence; right column: merged images.
[0026] Figure 5: Cell motion induced by an external magnetic field. Live confocal imaging of b.End3 cells following 5-hour incubation with bolavesicles. Top row: Cells incubated with magnetic bolavesicles (GLH-20). Rapid movement of the cells towards the externally- placed magnet was recorded. Bottom row: Cells incubated with conventional (non-magnetic) bolavesicles (GLH-20). No cell movement has been observed.
DEFINITIONS
Chemical Definitions
[0027] Definitions of specific functional groups and chemical terms are described in more detail below. The chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 75th Ed., inside cover, and specific functional groups are generally defined as described therein. Additionally, general principles of organic chemistry, as well as specific functional moieties and reactivity, are described in Thomas Sorrell, Organic Chemistry, University Science Books, Sausalito, 1999; Smith and March, March 's Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 2001 ; Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers, Inc., New York, 1989; and Carruthers, Some Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, 1987. [0028] Compounds described herein can comprise one or more asymmetric centers, and thus can exist in various isomeric forms, e.g., enantiomers and/or diastereomers. For example, the compounds described herein can be in the form of an individual enantiomer, diastereomer or geometric isomer, or can be in the form of a mixture of stereoisomers, including racemic mixtures and mixtures enriched in one or more stereoisomer. Isomers can be isolated from mixtures by methods known to those skilled in the art, including chiral high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) and the formation and crystallization of chiral salts; or preferred isomers can be prepared by asymmetric syntheses. See, for example, Jacques et ah,
Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions (Wiley Interscience, New York, 1981); Wilen et ah, Tetrahedron 33:2725 (1977); Eliel, Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and Wilen, Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions p. 268 (E.L. Eliel, Ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, IN 1972). The invention additionally encompasses compounds described herein as individual isomers substantially free of other isomers, and alternatively, as mixtures of various isomers.
[0029] When a range of values is listed, it is intended to encompass each value and subrange within the range. For example "Ci-6 alkyl" is intended to encompass, Ci, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, Ci-6, Ci_5, Ci^, Ci_3, Ci_2, C2_6, C2_5, C2_4, C2_3, C3_6, C3_5, C4_6, C4_5, and Cs_6 alkyl.
[0030] The following terms are intended to have the meanings presented therewith below and are useful in understanding the description and intended scope of the present invention. When describing the invention, which may include compounds, pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds and methods of using such compounds and compositions, the following terms, if present, have the following meanings unless otherwise indicated. It should also be understood that when described herein any of the moieties defined forth below may be substituted with a variety of substituents, and that the respective definitions are intended to include such substituted moieties within their scope as set out below. Unless otherwise stated, the term "substituted" is to be defined as set out below. It should be further understood that the terms "groups" and "radicals" can be considered interchangeable when used herein. The articles "a" and "an" may be used herein to refer to one or to more than one (i.e. at least one) of the grammatical objects of the article. By way of example "an analogue" means one analogue or more than one analogue.
[0031] "Alkyl" refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched saturated hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms ("Ci_2o alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 12 carbon atoms ("Ci_i2 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 10 carbon atoms ("Ci_io alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 9 carbon atoms ("Ci_9 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 8 carbon atoms ("Ci_8 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 7 carbon atoms ("Ci_7 alkyl"). In some
embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 6 carbon atoms ("Ci_6 alkyl", also referred to herein as "lower alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 5 carbon atoms ("Ci_5 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon atoms ("Ci_4 alkyl"). In some
embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 3 carbon atoms ("Ci_3 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 to 2 carbon atoms ("Ci_2 alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 1 carbon atom ("Ci alkyl"). In some embodiments, an alkyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms ("C2-6 alkyl"). Examples of Ci_6 alkyl groups include methyl (Ci), ethyl (C2), n-propyl (C3), isopropyl (C3), n-butyl (C4), tert-butyl (C4), sec-butyl (C4), iso-butyl (C4), n-pentyl (C5), 3-pentanyl (C5), amyl (C5), neopentyl (C5), 3-methyl-2-butanyl (C5), tertiary amyl (C5), and n-hexyl (Ce).
Additional examples of alkyl groups include n-heptyl (C7), n-octyl (C8) and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkyl") with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is unsubstituted Ci-w alkyl (e.g., -CH3). In certain embodiments, the alkyl group is substituted Ci-10 alkyl.
[0032] "Alkylene" refers to a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical. Exemplary divalent alkylene groups include, but are not limited to, methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-) and the like.
[0033] "Alkenyl" refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon double bonds, and no triple bonds ("C2_2o alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms ("C2_io alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms ("C2_9 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms ("C2_8 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms ("C2_7 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms ("C2_6 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms ("C2_5 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms ("C2^ alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms ("C2_3 alkenyl"). In some embodiments, an alkenyl group has 2 carbon atoms ("C2 alkenyl"). The one or more carbon-carbon double bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butenyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butenyl). Examples of C2^ alkenyl groups include ethenyl (C2), 1- propenyl (C3), 2-propenyl (C3), 1-butenyl (C4), 2-butenyl (C4), butadienyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2_6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkenyl groups as well as pentenyl (C5), pentadienyl (C5), hexenyl (Ce), and the like. Additional examples of alkenyl include heptenyl (C7), octenyl (Cs), octatrienyl (Cs), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkenyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkenyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkenyl") with one or more substituents e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is unsubstituted C2_10 alkenyl. In certain embodiments, the alkenyl group is substituted C2_10 alkenyl.
[0034] "Alkenylene" refers a substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical. Exemplary divalent alkenylene groups include, but are not limited to, ethenylene (-CH=CH-), propenylenes (e.g., - CH=CHCH2- and -C(CH3)=CH- and -CH=C(CH3)-) and the like.
[0035] "Alkynyl" refers to a radical of a straight-chain or branched hydrocarbon group having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds, and optionally one or more double bonds ("C2-20 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 10 carbon atoms ("C2-10 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 9 carbon atoms ("C2_9 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 8 carbon atoms ("C2-8 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 7 carbon atoms ("C2_7 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 6 carbon atoms ("C2_6 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 5 carbon atoms ("C2_s alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 4 carbon atoms
Figure imgf000011_0001
alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 to 3 carbon atoms ("C2-3 alkynyl"). In some embodiments, an alkynyl group has 2 carbon atoms ("C2 alkynyl"). The one or more carbon-carbon triple bonds can be internal (such as in 2-butynyl) or terminal (such as in 1-butynyl). Examples of C2-4 alkynyl groups include, without limitation, ethynyl (C2), 1-propynyl (C3), 2-propynyl (C3), 1-butynyl (C4), 2-butynyl (C4), and the like. Examples of C2-6 alkenyl groups include the aforementioned C2-4 alkynyl groups as well as pentynyl (C5), hexynyl (Ce), and the like. Additional examples of alkynyl include heptynyl (C7), octynyl (Cs), and the like. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an alkynyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted alkynyl") or substituted (a "substituted alkynyl") with one or more substituents; e.g., for instance from 1 to 5 substituents, 1 to 3 substituents, or 1 substituent. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is unsubstituted C2_10 alkynyl. In certain embodiments, the alkynyl group is substituted C2-10 alkynyl.
[0036] "Alkynylene" refers a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group, as defined above, wherein two hydrogens are removed to provide a divalent radical. Exemplary divalent alkynylene groups include, but are not limited to, ethynylene, propynylene, and the like. [0037] '"Aryl" refers to a radical of a monocyclic or polycyclic (e.g., bicyclic or tricyclic)
4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6, 10, or 14 π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having 6-14 ring carbon atoms and zero heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system ("C6-i4 aryl"). In some embodiments, an aryl group has six ring carbon atoms ("C6 aryl"; e.g., phenyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has ten ring carbon atoms ("C10 aryl"; e.g., naphthyl such as 1- naphthyl and 2-naphthyl). In some embodiments, an aryl group has fourteen ring carbon atoms ("Ci4 aryl"; e.g., anthracyl). "Aryl" also includes ring systems wherein the aryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the radical or point of attachment is on the aryl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbon atoms continue to designate the number of carbon atoms in the aryl ring system. Typical aryl groups include, but are not limited to, groups derived from aceanthrylene, acenaphthylene, acephenanthrylene, anthracene, azulene, benzene, chrysene, coronene, fluoranthene, fluorene, hexacene, hexaphene, hexalene, as-indacene, s-indacene, indane, indene, naphthalene, octacene, octaphene, octalene, ovalene, penta-2,4-diene, pentacene, pentalene, pentaphene, perylene, phenalene, phenanthrene, picene, pleiadene, pyrene, pyranthrene, rubicene, triphenylene, and trinaphthalene. Particularly aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of an aryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e.,
unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted aryl") or substituted (a "substituted aryl") with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is unsubstituted C6-i4 aryl. In certain embodiments, the aryl group is substituted C6-i4 aryl.
[0038] In certain embodiments, an aryl group substituted with one or more of groups selected from halo, Ci-Cs alkyl, Ci-Cs haloalkyl, cyano, hydroxy, Ci-Cs alkoxy, and amino.
[0039] Exam les of representative substituted aryls include the following
Figure imgf000012_0001
In these formulae one of R and R may be hydrogen and at least one of R and R is each independently selected from Ci-Cs alkyl, Ci-Cs haloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, alkanoyl, Ci-Cs alkoxy, heteroaryloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, heteroarylamino, NR58COR59,
NR58SOR59 R58S02R59, COOalkyl, COOaryl, CONR58R59, CONR58OR59, NR58R59,
S02NR58R59, S-alkyl, SOalkyl, S02alkyl, Saryl, SOaryl, S02aryl; or R56 and R57 may be joined to form a cyclic ring (saturated or unsaturated) from 5 to 8 atoms, optionally containing one or more heteroatoms selected from the group N, O, or S. R60 and R61 are independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C1-C4 haloalkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, substituted
C6-C10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or substituted 5-10 membered heteroaryl. [0040] "Fused aryl" refers to an aryl having two of its ring carbon in common with a second aryl ring or with an aliphatic ring.
[0041] "Aralkyl" is a subset of alkyl and aryl, as defined herein, and refers to an optionally substituted alkyl group substituted by an optionally substituted aryl group.
[0042] "Heteroaryl" refers to a radical of a 5-10 membered monocyclic or bicyclic 4n+2 aromatic ring system (e.g., having 6 or 10 π electrons shared in a cyclic array) having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulfur ("5-10 membered heteroaryl"). In heteroaryl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. Heteroaryl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. "Heteroaryl" includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heteroaryl ring system. "Heteroaryl" also includes ring systems wherein the heteroaryl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the aryl or heteroaryl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members designates the number of ring members in the fused (aryl/heteroaryl) ring system. Bicyclic heteroaryl groups wherein one ring does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., indolyl, quinolinyl, carbazolyl, and the like) the point of attachment can be on either ring, i.e., either the ring bearing a heteroatom (e.g., 2-indolyl) or the ring that does not contain a heteroatom (e.g., 5-indolyl).
[0043] In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-10 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-10 membered heteroaryl"). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-8 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-8 membered heteroaryl"). In some embodiments, a heteroaryl group is a 5-6 membered aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms provided in the aromatic ring system, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-6 membered heteroaryl"). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heteroaryl has 1 ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a heteroaryl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e., unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted heteroaryl") or substituted (a "substituted heteroaryl") with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is unsubstituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl. In certain embodiments, the heteroaryl group is substituted 5-14 membered heteroaryl.
[0044] Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyrrolyl, furanyl and thiophenyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, and isothiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, and thiadiazolyl. Exemplary 5-membered heteroaryl groups containing four heteroatoms include, without limitation, tetrazolyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, pyridinyl. Exemplary 6-membered heteroaryl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyrazinyl. Exemplary 6- membered heteroaryl groups containing three or four heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinyl and tetrazinyl, respectively. Exemplary 7-membered heteroaryl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepinyl, oxepinyl, and thiepinyl. Exemplary 5,6- bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, indolyl, isoindolyl, indazolyl,
benzotriazolyl, benzothiophenyl, isobenzothiophenyl, benzofuranyl, benzoisofuranyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzthiazolyl, benzisothiazolyl, benzthiadiazolyl, indolizinyl, and purinyl. Exemplary 6,6-bicyclic heteroaryl groups include, without limitation, naphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinoxalinyl, phthalazinyl, and quinazolinyl.
[0045] Exam les of representative heteroaryls include the following:
Figure imgf000014_0001
wherein each Y is selected from carbonyl, N, NR , O, and S; and R is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5-10 membered heteroaryl. Examples of representative aryl having hetero atoms containing substitution
Figure imgf000015_0001
wherein each W is selected from C(R )2, NR , O, and S; and each Y is selected from carbonyl, NR66, O and S; and R66 is independently hydrogen, Ci-C8 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, and 5- 10 membered heteroaryl.
[0047] "Heteroaralkyl" is a subset of alkyl and heteroaryl, as defined herein, and refers to an optionally substituted alkyl group substituted by an optionally substituted heteroaryl group.
[0048] "Carbocyclyl" or "carbocyclic" refers to a radical of a non-aromatic cyclic hydrocarbon group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("C3_io carbocyclyl") and zero heteroatoms in the non-aromatic ring system. In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms ("C3_s carbocyclyl"). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C3-6 carbocyclyl"). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C3-6 carbocyclyl"). In some embodiments, a carbocyclyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("Cs-io carbocyclyl"). Exemplary C3-6 carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, cyclopropyl (C3), cyclopropenyl (C3), cyclobutyl (C4), cyclobutenyl (C4), cyclopentyl (C5), cyclopentenyl (C5), cyclohexyl (Ce), cyclohexenyl (Ce), cyclohexadienyl (Ce), and the like. Exemplary C3_s carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3-6 carbocyclyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7), cycloheptenyl (C7), cycloheptadienyl (C7), cycloheptatrienyl (C7), cyclooctyl (C8), cyclooctenyl (C8), bicyclo[2.2.1 ]heptanyl (C7), bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl (C8), and the like. Exemplary C3_io carbocyclyl groups include, without limitation, the aforementioned C3_s carbocyclyl groups as well as cyclononyl (C9), cyclononenyl (C9), cyclodecyl (Cio), cyclodecenyl (Cio), octahydro-lH-indenyl (C9), decahydronaphthalenyl (Cio), spiro[4.5]decanyl (Cio), and the like. As the foregoing examples illustrate, in certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is either monocyclic ("monocyclic carbocyclyl") or contain a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system ("bicyclic carbocyclyl") and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. "Carbocyclyl" also includes ring systems wherein the carbocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups wherein the point of attachment is on the carbocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of carbons continue to designate the number of carbons in the carbocyclic ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a carbocyclyl group is independently optionally substituted, i.e. , unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted carbocyclyl") or substituted (a "substituted carbocyclyl") with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is unsubstituted C3_io carbocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the carbocyclyl group is a substituted C3_io carbocyclyl.
[0049] In some embodiments, "carbocyclyl" is a monocyclic, saturated carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("C3_io cycloalkyl"). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 8 ring carbon atoms ("C3_s cycloalkyl"). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 3 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C3_6 cycloalkyl"). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 6 ring carbon atoms ("C5_6 cycloalkyl"). In some embodiments, a cycloalkyl group has 5 to 10 ring carbon atoms ("Cs-io cycloalkyl"). Examples of C5-6 cycloalkyl groups include cyclopentyl (C5) and cyclohexyl (C5). Examples of C3-6 cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C5-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cyclopropyl (C3) and cyclobutyl (C4).
Examples of C3_s cycloalkyl groups include the aforementioned C3-6 cycloalkyl groups as well as cycloheptyl (C7) and cyclooctyl (C8). Unless otherwise specified, each instance of a cycloalkyl group is independently unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted cycloalkyl") or substituted (a
"substituted cycloalkyl") with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is unsubstituted C3_io cycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the cycloalkyl group is substituted C3-10 cycloalkyl.
[0050] "Heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic" refers to a radical of a 3- to 10-membered non- aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1 to 4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon ("3-10 membered heterocyclyl"). In heterocyclyl groups that contain one or more nitrogen atoms, the point of attachment can be a carbon or nitrogen atom, as valency permits. A heterocyclyl group can either be monocyclic ("monocyclic heterocyclyl") or a fused, bridged or spiro ring system such as a bicyclic system ("bicyclic heterocyclyl"), and can be saturated or can be partially unsaturated. Heterocyclyl bicyclic ring systems can include one or more heteroatoms in one or both rings. "Heterocyclyl" also includes ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more carbocyclyl groups wherein the point of attachment is either on the carbocyclyl or heterocyclyl ring, or ring systems wherein the heterocyclyl ring, as defined above, is fused with one or more aryl or heteroaryl groups, wherein the point of attachment is on the heterocyclyl ring, and in such instances, the number of ring members continue to designate the number of ring members in the heterocyclyl ring system. Unless otherwise specified, each instance of heterocyclyl is independently optionally substituted, i. e. , unsubstituted (an "unsubstituted heterocyclyl") or substituted (a "substituted heterocyclyl") with one or more substituents. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is unsubstituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. In certain embodiments, the heterocyclyl group is substituted 3-10 membered heterocyclyl. [0051] In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-10 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, boron, phosphorus, and silicon ("5-10 membered heterocyclyl"). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-8 membered non- aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-8 membered heterocyclyl"). In some embodiments, a heterocyclyl group is a 5-6 membered non-aromatic ring system having ring carbon atoms and 1-4 ring heteroatoms, wherein each heteroatom is independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur ("5-6 membered heterocyclyl"). In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-3 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has 1-2 ring heteroatoms selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. In some embodiments, the 5-6 membered heterocyclyl has one ring heteroatom selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
[0052] Exemplary 3-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azirdinyl, oxiranyl, thiorenyl. Exemplary 4-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azetidinyl, oxetanyl and thietanyl.
Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, dihydrothiophenyl, pyrrolidinyl, dihydropyrrolyl and pyrrolyl-2,5-dione. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, dioxolanyl, oxasulfuranyl, disulfuranyl, and oxazolidin-2-one. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups containing three heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazolinyl, oxadiazolinyl, and thiadiazolinyl.
Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, piperidinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, dihydropyridinyl, and thianyl. Exemplary 6- membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, piperazinyl, morpholinyl, dithianyl, dioxanyl. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups containing two heteroatoms include, without limitation, triazinanyl. Exemplary 7-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azepanyl, oxepanyl and thiepanyl. Exemplary 8-membered heterocyclyl groups containing one heteroatom include, without limitation, azocanyl, oxecanyl and thiocanyl. Exemplary 5-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to a e aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 5,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, indolinyl, isoindolinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzoxazolinonyl, and the like. Exemplary 6-membered heterocyclyl groups fused to an aryl ring (also referred to herein as a 6,6-bicyclic heterocyclic ring) include, without limitation, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, and the like. Particular examples of heterocyclyl groups are shown in the following illustrative
Figure imgf000018_0001
[0054] wherein each W is selected from CR , C(ic')2, NR , O, and S; and each Y is selected from NR67, O, and S; and R67 is independently hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl. These heterocyclyl rings may be optionally substituted with one or more substituents selected from the group consisting of the group consisting of acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkoxycarbonylamino, amino, substituted amino, aminocarbonyl (carbamoyl or amido), aminocarbonylamino, aminosulfonyl, sulfonylamino, aryl, aryloxy, azido, carboxyl, cyano, cycloalkyl, halogen, hydroxy, keto, nitro, thiol, -S-alkyl, -S-aryl, -S(0)-alkyl,-S(0)-aryl, -S(0)2-alkyl, and -S(0)2- aryl. Substituting groups include carbonyl or thiocarbonyl which provide, for example, lactam and urea derivatives.
[0055] "Hetero" when used to describe a compound or a group present on a compound means that one or more carbon atoms in the compound or group have been replaced by a nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur heteroatom. Hetero may be applied to any of the hydrocarbyl groups described above such as alkyl, e.g., heteroalkyl, cycloalkyl, e.g., heterocyclyl, aryl, e.g,.
heteroaryl, cycloalkenyl, e.g,. cycloheteroalkenyl, and the like having from 1 to 5, and particularly from 1 to 3 heteroatoms.
[0056] "Acyl" refers to a radical -C(0)R20, where R20 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, as defined herein. "Alkanoyl" is an acyl group wherein R20 is a group other than hydrogen. Representative acyl groups include, but are not limited to, formyl (-CHO), acetyl (-C(=0)CH3), cyclohexylcarbonyl,
cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl (-C(=0)Ph), benzylcarbonyl (-C(=0)CH2Ph),— C(0)-Ci-C8 alkyl, -C(O)-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -C(O)-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(0)-(CH2)t(C3-
C10 cycloalkyl), and -C(O)-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4. In certain embodiments, R21 is Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0057] "Acylamino" refers to a radical -NR22C(0)R23, where each instance of R22 and
R23 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl,, as defined herein, or R22 is an amino protecting group. Exemplary "acylamino" groups include, but are not limited to, formylamino, acetylamino, cyclohexylcarbonylamino, cyclohexylmethyl-carbonylamino, benzoylamino and benzylcarbonylamino. Particular exemplary "acylamino" groups are -NR24C(0)-Ci-C8 alkyl, -NR24C(O)-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), - NR24C(O)-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR24C(0)-(CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), and - NR24C(O)-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, and each R24 independently represents H or Ci-Cs alkyl. In certain embodiments, R25 is H, Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; and R26 is H, Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy;
C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxyl; provided that at least one of R25 and R26 is other than H.
[0058] "Acyloxy" refers to a radical -OC(0)R27, where R27 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstitued alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, as defined herein. Representative examples include, but are not limited to, formyl, acetyl, cyclohexylcarbonyl,
cyclohexylmethylcarbonyl, benzoyl and benzylcarbonyl. In certain embodiments, R28 is Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, arylalkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl or heteroarylalkyl, each of which is substituted with unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. [0059] "Alkoxy" refers to the group -OR where R is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl. Particular alkoxy groups are methoxy, ethoxy, n- propoxy, isopropoxy, n-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, and 1,2- dimethylbutoxy. Particular alkoxy groups are lower alkoxy, i.e. with between 1 and 6 carbon atoms. Further particular alkoxy groups have between 1 and 4 carbon atoms.
[0060] In certain embodiments, R29 is a group that has 1 or more substituents, for instance, from 1 to 5 substituents, and particularly from 1 to 3 substituents, in particular 1 substituent, selected from the group consisting of amino, substituted amino, C6-C10 aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, cyano, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, halogen, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, hydroxyl, nitro, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy, thiol, alkyl-S(O)-, aryl-S(O)-, alkyl-S(0)2- and aryl-S(0)2-. Exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups include, but are not limited to, -O- (CH2)t(C6-Cio aryl), -O-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -0-(CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), and - O-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4 and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. Particular exemplary 'substituted alkoxy' groups are -OCF3, -OCH2CF3, -OCH2Ph, -OCH2-cyclopropyl, - OCH2CH2OH, and -OCH2CH2NMe2.
[0061] "Amino" refers to the radical -NH2.
[0062] "Substituted amino" refers to an amino group of the formula -N(R38)2 wherein R38 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R38 is not a hydrogen. In certain embodiments,each R38 is independently selected from: hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C8 alkenyl, C3-C8 alkynyl, C6-C10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, or C3-C10 cycloalkyl; or Ci-Cs alkyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkenyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy; C3-C8 alkynyl, substituted with halo or hydroxy, or -(CH2)t(C6-Cio aryl), -(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), - (CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), or -(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer between 0 and 8, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; or both R38 groups are joined to form an alkylene group. [0063] Exemplary 'substituted amino' groups are -NR -Ci-Cs alkyl, -NR39-(CH2)t(C6-
Cio aryl), -NR39-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -NR39-(CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), and - NR39-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, for instance 1 or 2, each R39 independently represents H or Ci-Cs alkyl and any alkyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by halo, substituted or unsubstituted amino, or hydroxy; and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl, or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy. For the avoidance of doubt the term 'substituted amino' includes the groups alkylamino, substituted alkylamino, alkylarylamino, substituted alkylarylamino, arylamino, substituted arylamino, dialkylamino, and substituted dialkylamino as defined below. Substituted amino encompasses both monosubstituted amino and disubstituted amino groups.
[0064] "Azido" refers to the radical -N3.
[0065] "Carbamoyl" or "amido" refers to the radical -C(0)NH2.
[0066] "Substituted carbamoyl" or "substituted amido" refers to the radical -C(0)N(R62)2 wherein each R62 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkenyl, substituted or unsubstitued alkynyl, substituted or unsubstitued carbocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstitued heteroaryl, or an amino protecting group, wherein at least one of R62 is not a hydrogen. In certain embodiments, R62 is selected from H, Ci-Cs alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl; or Ci-Cs alkyl substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C3-C10 cycloalkyl, 4-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-C10 aryl, aralkyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl, each of which is substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy; provided that at least one R62 is other than H.
[0067] Exemplary 'substituted carbamoyl' groups include, but are not limited to, -C(O)
NR^-Ci-Cs alkyl, -C(O)NR64-(CH2)t(C6-Ci0 aryl), -C(O)N64-(CH2)t(5-10 membered heteroaryl), -C(0)NR64-(CH2)t(C3-Cio cycloalkyl), and -C(O)NR64-(CH2)t(4-10 membered heterocyclyl), wherein t is an integer from 0 to 4, each R64 independently represents H or Ci-Cs alkyl and any aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl groups present, may themselves be substituted by unsubstituted C1-C4 alkyl, halo, unsubstituted C1-C4 alkoxy, unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkyl, unsubstituted C1-C4 hydroxyalkyl, or unsubstituted C1-C4 haloalkoxy or hydroxy.
[0068] 'Carboxy' refers to the radical -C(0)OH.
[0069] "Cyano" refers to the radical -CN. [0070] "Halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro (F), chloro (CI), bromo (Br), and iodo (I). In certain embodiments, the halo group is either fluoro or chloro. In further embodiments, the halo group is iodo.
[0071] "Hydroxy" refers to the radical -OH.
[0072] "Nitro" refers to the radical -N02.
[0073] "Cycloalkylalkyl" refers to an alkyl radical in which the alkyl group is substituted with a cycloalkyl group. Typical cycloalkylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, cycloheptylmethyl, cyclooctylmethyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, cycloheptylethyl, and cyclooctylethyl, and the like.
[0074] "Heterocyclylalkyl" refers to an alkyl radical in which the alkyl group is substituted with a heterocyclyl group. Typical heterocyclylalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, pyrrolidinylmethyl, piperidinylmethyl, piperazinylmethyl, morpholinylmethyl, pyrrolidinylethyl, piperidinylethyl, piperazinylethyl, morpholinylethyl, and the like.
[0075] "Cycloalkenyl" refers to substituted or unsubstituted carbocyclyl group having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms and having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings, including fused and bridged ring systems and having at least one and particularly from 1 to 2 sites of olefinic unsaturation. Such cycloalkenyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclohexenyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopropenyl, and the like.
[0076] "Fused cycloalkenyl" refers to a cycloalkenyl having two of its ring carbon atoms in common with a second aliphatic or aromatic ring and having its olefinic unsaturation located to impart aromaticity to the cycloalkenyl ring.
[0077] "Ethenyl" refers to substituted or unsubstituted -(C=C)-.
[0078] "Ethylene" refers to substituted or unsubstituted -(C-C)-.
[0079] "Ethynyl" refers to -(C≡C)-.
[0080] "Nitrogen-containing heterocyclyl" group means a 4- to 7- membered non- aromatic cyclic group containing at least one nitrogen atom, for example, but without limitation, morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 2- pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), azetidine, pyrrolidone, imidazoline, imidazolidinone, 2- pyrazoline, pyrazolidine, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine. Particular examples include azetidine, piperidone and piperazone.
[0081] "Thioketo" refers to the group =S.
[0082] Alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl groups, as defined herein, are optionally substituted (e.g., "substituted" or "unsubstituted" alkyl,
"substituted" or "unsubstituted" alkenyl, "substituted" or "unsubstituted" alkynyl, "substituted" or "unsubstituted" carbocyclyl, "substituted" or "unsubstituted" heterocyclyl, "substituted" or "unsubstituted" aryl or "substituted" or "unsubstituted" heteroaryl group). In general, the term "substituted", whether preceded by the term "optionally" or not, means that at least one hydrogen present on a group (e.g., a carbon or nitrogen atom) is replaced with a permissible substituent, e.g., a substituent which upon substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., a compound which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such as by rearrangement, cyclization, elimination, or other reaction. Unless otherwise indicated, a "substituted" group has a substituent at one or more substitutable positions of the group, and when more than one position in any given structure is substituted, the substituent is either the same or different at each position. The term "substituted" is contemplated to include substitution with all permissible substituents of organic compounds, any of the substituents described herein that results in the formation of a stable compound. The present invention contemplates any and all such combinations in order to arrive at a stable compound. For purposes of this invention, heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any suitable substituent as described herein which satisfy the valencies of the heteroatoms and results in the formation of a stable moiety.
[0083] Exemplary carbon atom substituents include, but are not limited to, halogen, -CN,
-NO2, -N3, -S02H, -SO3H, -OH, -ORaa, -ON(Rbb)2, -N(Rbb)2, -N(Rbb)3 +X~, -N(ORcc)Rbb, - SH, -SRaa, -SSRCC, -C(=0)Raa, -C02H, -CHO, -C(ORcc)2, -C02Raa, -OC(=0)Raa, -OC02Raa, - C(=0)N(Rbb)2, -OC(=0)N(Rbb)2, -NRbbC(=0)Raa, -NRbbC02Raa, -NRbbC(=0)N(Rbb)2, - C(=NRbb)Raa, -C(=NRbb)ORaa, -OC(=NRbb)Raa, -OC(=NRbb)ORaa, -C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2, - OC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2, -NRbbC(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2, -C(=0)NRbbS02Raa, -NRbbS02Raa, -S02N(Rbb)2, - S02Raa, -SOzOR33, -OS02Raa, -S(=0)Raa, -OS(=0)Raa, -Si(Raa)3, -OSiC ^s -C(=S)N(Rbb)2, - C(=0)SRaa, -C(=S)SRaa, -SC(=S)SRaa, -SC(=0)SRaa, -OC(=0)SRaa, -SC(=0)ORaa, - SC(=0)Raa, -P(=0)2Raa, -OP(=0)2Raa, -P(=0)(Raa)2, -OP(=0)(Raa)2, -OP(=0)(ORcc)2, - P(=0)2N(Rbb)2, -OP(=0)2N(Rbb)2, -P(=0)( Rbb)2, -OP(=0)(NRbb)2, -NRbbP(=0)(ORcc)2, - NRbbP(=0)( Rbb)2, -P(RCC)2, -P(RCC)3, -OP(Rcc)2, -OP(Rcc)3, -B(Raa)2, -B(ORcc)2, -BRaa(ORcc), Ci_io alkyl, Ci_io perhaloalkyl, C2_io alkenyl, C2_io alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-i4 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
or two geminal hydrogens on a carbon atom are replaced with the group =0, =S, = (Rbb)2, = RbbC(=0)Raa, = RbbC(=0)ORaa, = RbbS(=0)2Raa, =NRbb, or =NORcc;
each instance of Raa is, independently, selected from Ci_io alkyl, Ci-w perhaloalkyl, C2_io alkenyl, C2_io alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-i4 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Raa groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
each instance of Rbb is, independently, selected from hydrogen, -OH, -ORaa, -N(RCC)2, -CN, - C(=0)Raa, -C(=0)N(Rcc)2, -COzR33, -S02Raa, -C(=NRcc)ORaa, -C(=NRCC)N(RCC)2, -S02N(Rcc)2, -S02Rcc, -S02ORcc, -SORaa, -C(=S)N(RCC)2, -C(=0)SRcc, -C(=S)SRCC, -P(=0)2Raa, - P(=0)(Raa)2, -P(=0)2N(Rcc)2, -P(=0)(NRcc)2, Ci_i„ alkyl, Ci_i„ perhaloalkyl, C2_10 alkenyl, C2_10 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rbb groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
each instance of Rcc is, independently, selected from hydrogen, Ci_io alkyl, Ci_io perhaloalkyl, C2_io alkenyl, C2_io alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups;
each instance of Rdd is, independently, selected from halogen, -CN, -N02, -N3, -S02H, -SO3H, -OH, -ORee, -ON(Rff)2, -N(Rff)2, -N(Rff)3 +X~, -N(ORee)Rff, -SH, -SRee, -SSRee, -C(=0)Ree, - C02H, -C02Ree, -OC(=0)Ree, -OC02Ree, -C(=0)N(Rff)2, -OC(=0)N(Rff)2, -NRffC(=0)Ree, - NRffC02Ree, -NRffC(=0)N(Rff)2, -C(=NRff)ORee, -OC(=NRff)Ree, -OC(=NRff)ORee, - C(=NRff)N(Rff)2, -OC(=NRff)N(Rff)2, -NRffC(=NRff)N(Rff)2,-NRffS02Ree, -S02N(Rff)2, - S02Ree, -S02ORee, -OS02Ree, -S(=0)Ree, -Si(Ree)3, -OSi(Ree)3, -C(=S)N(Rff)2, -C(=0)SRee, - C(=S)SRee, -SC(=S)SRee, -P(=0)2Ree, -P(=0)(Ree)2, -OP(=0)(Ree)2, -OP(=0)(ORee)2, Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 perhaloalkyl, C2_6 alkenyl, C2_6 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rss groups, or two geminal Rdd substituents can be joined to form =0 or =S;
each instance of Ree is, independently, selected from Ci_6 alkyl, Ci_6 perhaloalkyl, C2_6 alkenyl, C2_6 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, C6-10 aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, and 3-10 membered heteroaryl, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rss groups;
each instance of R ff is, independently, selected from hydrogen, Ci-6 alkyl, Ci-6 perhaloalkyl, C2-6 alkenyl, C2_6 alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, C6-10 aryl and 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or two R ff groups are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5- 14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rss groups; and each instance of R88 is, independently, halogen, -CN, -N02, -N3, -S02H, -S03H, -OH, -OC1-6 alkyl, -ON(d_6 alkyl)2, -N(d_6 alkyl)2, -N(d_6 alkyl)3 +X- -NH(d_6 alkyl)2 +X- -NH2(d_6 alkyl) +X~, -NH3 +X~, -N(OCi^ alkyl)(d_6 alkyl), -N(OH)(Ci_6 alkyl), -NH(OH), -SH, -Sd_6 alkyl, -SS(d_6 alkyl), -C(=0)(d_6 alkyl), -C02H, -C02(C^ alkyl), -OC(=0)(C^ alkyl), -
OC02(Ci_6 alkyl), -C(=0)NH2,
Figure imgf000025_0001
alkyl), -NHC(=0)( d-
6 alkyl), -N(d_6 alkyl)C(=0)( alkyl), -NHC02(d_6 alkyl), -NHC(=0)N(C^ alkyl)2, -
NHC(=0)NH(Ci-6 alkyl), -NHC(=0)NH2,
Figure imgf000025_0002
alkyl), -
OC(=NH)OCi_6 alkyl, -C(= H)N(C1_6 alkyl)2, -C(=NH)NH(Ci-6 alkyl), -C(=NH)NH2, -
OC(=NH)N(Ci-6 alkyl)2, -OC(NH)NH(Ci-6 alkyl), -OC(NH)NH2, -NHC(NH)N(Ci-6 alkyl)2, -
NHC(=NH)NH2,
Figure imgf000025_0003
alkyl), -S02N(Ci_6 alkyl)2, -S02NH(Ci_6 alkyl), -S02NH2 -
S02Ci_6 alkyl, -S020d_6 alkyl, -OS02Ci_6 alkyl,
Figure imgf000025_0004
alkyl)3 -C(=S)N(d_6 alkyl)2, C(=S)NH(d_6 alkyl), C(=S)NH2, -C(=0)S(C^ alkyl), -
C(=S)Sd_6 alkyl, -SC(=S)SC^ alkyl, -P(=0)2(d_6 alkyl), -P(=0)(d_6 alkyl)2, -OP(=0)(d_6 alkyl)2, -OP(=0)(OCi_6 alkyl)2, Ci^ alkyl, perhaloalkyl, C2_6 alkenyl, C2_6 alkynyl, C3_i0 carbocyclyl, d-io aryl, 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or two geminal
R88 substituents can be joined to form =0 or =S; wherein X is a counterion.
[0084] A "counterion" or "anionic counterion" is a negatively charged group associated with a cationic quaternary amino group in order to maintain electronic neutrality. Exemplary counterions include halide ions (e.g., F~ CI", Br", Γ), N03 ~ , C104 , OFT, H2P04 HS04 sulfonate ions (e.g., methansulfonate, trifluoromethanesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate,
benzenesulfonate, 10-camphor sulfonate, naphthalene-2-sulfonate, naphthalene- 1 -sulfonic acid-5-sulfonate, ethan-1 -sulfonic acid-2-sulfonate, and the like), and carboxylate ions (e.g., acetate, ethanoate, propanoate, benzoate, glycerate, lactate, tartrate, glycolate, and the like).
[0085] Nitrogen atoms can be substituted or unsubstituted as valency permits, and include primary, secondary, tertiary, and quarternary nitrogen atoms. Exemplary nitrogen atom substitutents include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, -OH, -ORaa, -N(RCC)2, -CN, -C(=0)Raa,
-C(=0)N(Rcc)2, -COzR33, -SOzR33, -C(=NRbb)Raa, -C(=NRcc)ORaa, -C(=NRCC)N(RCC)2, -
S02N(Rcc)2, -S02Rcc, -S02ORcc, -SOR33, -C(=S)N(RCC)2, -C(=0)SRcc, -C(=S)SRCC, -P(=0)2Raa,
-P(=0)(Raa)2, -P(=0)2N(Rcc)2, -P(=0)(NRcc)2, d_10 alkyl, d_10 perhaloalkyl, C2_10 alkenyl, C2_ io alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, d-i4 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl, or two Rcc groups attached to a nitrogen atom are joined to form a 3-14 membered heterocyclyl or 5-14 membered heteroaryl ring, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd
groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc and Rdd are as defined above. [0086] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on a nitrogen atom is a nitrogen protecting group (also referred to as an amino protecting group). Nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, -OH, -ORaa, -N(RCC)2, -C(=0)Raa, -C(=0)N(Rcc)2, -C02Raa, - S02Raa, -C(=NRcc)Raa, -C(=NRcc)ORaa, -C(=NRCC)N(RCC)2, -S02N(Rcc)2, -S02Rcc, -S02ORcc, - SORaa, -C(=S)N(RCC)2, -C(=0)SRcc, -C(=S)SRCC, Ci-W alkyl (e.g., aralkyl, heteroaralkyl), d-w alkenyl, C2_io alkynyl, C3_io carbocyclyl, 3-14 membered heterocyclyl, C6-14 aryl, and 5-14 membered heteroaryl groups, wherein each alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, aryl, and heteroaryl is independently substituted with 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 Rdd groups, and wherein Raa, Rbb, Rcc and Rdd are as defined herein. Nitrogen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
[0087] For example, nitrogen protecting groups such as amide groups (e.g., -C(=0)Raa) include, but are not limited to, formamide, acetamide, chloroacetamide, trichloroacetamide, trifluoroacetamide, phenylacetamide, 3-phenylpropanamide, picolinamide, 3- pyridylcarboxamide, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, benzamide, -phenylbenzamide, o- nitophenylacetamide, o-nitrophenoxyacetamide, acetoacetamide, (N - dithiobenzyloxyacylamino)acetamide, 3-(p-hydroxyphenyl)propanamide, 3-(o- nitrophenyl)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o-nitrophenoxy)propanamide, 2-methyl-2-(o- phenylazophenoxy)propanamide, 4-chlorobutanamide, 3-methyl-3-nitrobutanamide, o- nitrocinnamide, N-acetylmethionine derivative, o-nitrobenzamide and o- (benzoyloxymethyl)benzamide.
[0088] Nitrogen protecting groups such as carbamate groups (e.g., -C(=0)ORaa) include, but are not limited to, methyl carbamate, ethyl carbamante, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbamate (Fmoc), 9-(2-sulfo)fluorenylmethyl carbamate, 9-(2,7-dibromo)fluoroenylmethyl carbamate, 2,7-di-?-butyl-[9-(10, 10-dioxo-lO, 10, 10, 10-tetrahydrothioxanthyl)] methyl carbamate (DBD- Tmoc), 4-methoxyphenacyl carbamate (Phenoc), 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (Troc), 2- trimethylsilylethyl carbamate (Teoc), 2-phenylethyl carbamate (hZ), 1 -(1-adamantyl)- 1- methylethyl carbamate (Adpoc), l,l-dimethyl-2-haloethyl carbamate, 1,1-dimethy 1-2,2- dibromoethyl carbamate (DB-?-BOC), l,l-dimethyl-2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbamate (TCBOC), l-methyl-l-(4-biphenylyl)ethyl carbamate (Bpoc), l-(3,5-di-?-butylphenyl)-l-methylethyl carbamate (?-Bumeoc), 2-(2'- and 4'-pyridyl)ethyl carbamate (Pyoc), 2-(N,N- dicyclohexylcarboxamido)ethyl carbamate, ?-butyl carbamate (BOC), 1-adamantyl carbamate (Adoc), vinyl carbamate (Voc), allyl carbamate (Alloc), 1-isopropylallyl carbamate (Ipaoc), cinnamyl carbamate (Coc), 4-nitrocinnamyl carbamate (Noc), 8-quinolyl carbamate, N- hydroxypiperidinyl carbamate, alkyldithio carbamate, benzyl carbamate (Cbz), -methoxybenzyl carbamate (Moz), -nitobenzyl carbamate, -bromobenzyl carbamate, -chlorobenzyl carbamate, 2,4-dichlorobenzyl carbamate, 4-methylsulfinylbenzyl carbamate (Msz), 9- anthrylmethyl carbamate, diphenylmethyl carbamate, 2-methylthioethyl carbamate, 2- methylsulfonylethyl carbamate, 2-(p-toluenesulfonyl)ethyl carbamate, [2-(l,3-dithianyl)]methyl carbamate (Dmoc), 4-methylthiophenyl carbamate (Mtpc), 2,4-dimethylthiophenyl carbamate (Bmpc), 2-phosphonioethyl carbamate (Peoc), 2-triphenylphosphonioisopropyl carbamate (Ppoc), l,l-dimethyl-2-cyanoethyl carbamate, m-chloro-p-acyloxybenzyl carbamate, p- (dihydroxyboryl)benzyl carbamate, 5-benzisoxazolylmethyl carbamate, 2-(trifluoromethyl)-6- chromonylmethyl carbamate (Tcroc), m-nitrophenyl carbamate, 3,5-dimethoxybenzyl carbamate, o-nitrobenzyl carbamate, 3,4-dimethoxy-6-nitrobenzyl carbamate, phenyl(o- nitrophenyl)methyl carbamate, ?-amyl carbamate, «S-benzyl thiocarbamate, -cyanobenzyl carbamate, cyclobutyl carbamate, cyclohexyl carbamate, cyclopentyl carbamate,
cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, -decyloxybenzyl carbamate, 2,2-dimethoxyacylvinyl carbamate, o-(N,N-dimethylcarboxamido)benzyl carbamate, 1, l-dimethyl-3-(N,N- dimethylcarboxamido)propyl carbamate, 1, 1-dimethylpropynyl carbamate, di(2-pyridyl)methyl carbamate, 2-furanylmethyl carbamate, 2-iodoethyl carbamate, isoborynl carbamate, isobutyl carbamate, isonicotinyl carbamate, p-(p '-methoxyphenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 1- methylcyclobutyl carbamate, 1-methylcyclohexyl carbamate, 1 -methyl- 1 -cyclopropylmethyl carbamate, l-methyl-l-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1 -methyl- \-(p- phenylazophenyl)ethyl carbamate, 1 -methyl- 1-phenylethyl carbamate, 1 -methyl- 1 -(4- pyridyl)ethyl carbamate, phenyl carbamate, ^-(phenylazo)benzyl carbamate, 2,4,6— tri—i— butylphenyl carbamate, 4-(trimethylammonium)benzyl carbamate, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzyl carbamate.
[0089] Nitrogen protecting groups such as sulfonamide groups (e.g., -S(=0)2 aa) include, but are not limited to, -toluenesulfonamide (Ts), benzenesulfonamide, 2,3,6,-trimethyl-4- methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtr), 2,4,6-trimethoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mtb), 2,6-dimethyl- 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Pme), 2,3,5, 6-tetramethyl^-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mte), 4-methoxybenzenesulfonamide (Mbs), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzenesulfonamide (Mts), 2,6- dimethoxy-4-methy lbenzenesulfonamide (iMds), 2,2,5,7, 8-pentamethy lchroman-6- sulfonamide (Pmc), methanesulfonamide (Ms), β-trimethylsilylethanesulfonamide (SES), 9- anthracenesulfonamide, 4-(4',8'-dimethoxynaphthylmethyl)benzenesulfonamide (DNMBS), benzylsulfonamide, trifluoromethylsulfonamide, and phenacylsulfonamide.
[0090] Other nitrogen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, phenothiazinyl-
(10)-acyl derivative, N - -toluenesulfonylaminoacyl derivative, N'-phenylaminothioacyl derivative, N-benzoylphenylalanyl derivative, N-acetylmethionine derivative, 4,5-diphenyl-3- oxazolin-2-one, N-phthalimide, N-dithiasuccinimide (Dts), N-2,3-diphenylmaleimide, N-2,5- dimethylpyrrole, N-l,l,4,4-tetramethyldisilylazacyclopentane adduct (STABASE), 5- substituted l,3-dimethyl-l,3,5-triazacyclohexan-2-one, 5-substituted l,3-dibenzyl-l,3,5- triazacyclohexan-2-one, 1-substituted 3,5-dinitro^l-pyridone, N-methylamine, N-allylamine, N-[2-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxy]methylamine (SEM), N-3-acetoxypropylamine, N-(l-isopropyl^l- nitro-2-oxo-3-pyroolin-3-yl)amine, quaternary ammonium salts, N-benzylamine, N-di(4- methoxyphenyl)methylamine, N-5-dibenzosuberylamine, N-triphenylmethylamine (Tr), N-[(4- methoxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl]amine (MMTr), N-9-phenylfluorenylamine (PhF), N-2,7- dichloro-9-fluorenylmethyleneamine, N-ferrocenylmethylamino (Fcm), N-2-picolylamino N - oxide, N-l,l-dimethylthiomethyleneamine, N-benzylideneamine, N-p- methoxybenzylideneamine, N-diphenylmethyleneamine, N-[(2- pyridyl)mesityl]methyleneamine, N-(N',N'-dimethylaminomethylene)amine, Ν,Ν'- isopropylidenediamine, N- -nitrobenzylideneamine, N-salicylideneamine, N-5- chlorosalicylideneamine, N-(5-chloro-2-hydroxyphenyl)phenylmethyleneamine, N- cyclohexylideneamine, N-(5,5-dimethyl-3-oxo-l-cyclohexenyl)amine, N-borane derivative, N-diphenylborinic acid derivative, N-[phenyl(pentaacylchromium- or tungsten)acyl] amine, N- copper chelate, N-zinc chelate, N-nitroamine, N-nitrosoamine, amine N-oxide,
diphenylphosphinamide (Dpp), dimethylthiophosphinamide (Mpt), diphenylthiophosphinamide (Ppt), dialkyl phosphoramidates, dibenzyl phosphoramidate, diphenyl phosphoramidate, benzenesulfenamide, o-nitrobenzenesulfenamide (Nps), 2,4-dinitrobenzenesulfenamide, pentachlorobenzenesulfenamide, 2-nitro^-methoxybenzenesulfenamide,
triphenylmethylsulfenamide, and 3-nitropyridinesulfenamide (Npys).
[0091] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on an oxygen atom is an oxygen protecting group (also referred to as a hydroxyl protecting group). Oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, -Raa, -N(Rbb)2, -C(=0)SRaa, -C(=0)Raa, -C02Raa, - C(=0)N(Rbb)2, -C(=NRbb)Raa, -C(=NRbb)ORaa, -C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2, -S(=0)Raa, -S02Raa, - Si(Raa)3 -P(RCC)2, -P(RCC)3, -P(=0)2Raa, -P(=0)(Raa)2, -P(=0)(ORcc)2, -P(=0)2N(Rbb)2, and - P(=0)(NRbb)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Oxygen protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
[0092] Exemplary oxygen protecting groups include, but are not limited to, methyl, methoxylmethyl (MOM), methylthiomethyl (MTM), ?-butylthiomethyl,
(phenyldimethylsilyl)methoxymethyl (SMOM), benzyloxymethyl (BOM), methoxybenzyloxymethyl (PMBM), (4-methoxyphenoxy)methyl (p-AOM), guaiacolmethyl (GUM), £-butoxymethyl, 4-pentenyloxymethyl (POM), siloxy methyl, 2-methoxyethoxymethyl (MEM), 2,2,2-trichloroethoxymethyl, bis(2-chloroethoxy)methyl, 2-
(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl (SEMOR), tetrahydropyranyl (THP), 3-bromotetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, 1-methoxycyclohexyl, 4-methoxytetrahydropyranyl (MTHP), 4- methoxytetrahydrothiopyranyl, 4-methoxytetrahydrothiopyranyl S,S-dioxide, l-[(2-chloro^l- methyl)phenyl]-4-methoxypiperidin-4-yl (CTMP), l,4-dioxan-2-yl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothiofuranyl, 2,3,3a,4,5,6,7,7a-octahydro-7,8,8-trimethyl-4,7-methanobenzofuran-2- yl, 1-ethoxy ethyl, l-(2-chloroethoxy)ethyl, 1 -methyl- 1-methoxy ethyl, 1-methyl-l- benzyloxyethyl, l-methyl-l-benzyloxy-2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2- trimethylsilylethyl, 2-(phenylselenyl)ethyl, ?-butyl, allyl, -chlorophenyl, -methoxyphenyl, 2,4-dinitrophenyl, benzyl (Bn), -methoxybenzyl, 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl, o-nitrobenzyl, p- nitrobenzyl, -halobenzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, -cyanobenzyl, -phenylbenzyl, 2-picolyl, 4- picolyl, 3-methyl-2-picolyl N-oxido, diphenylmethyl, p,p '-dinitrobenzhydryl, 5- dibenzosuberyl, triphenylmethyl, a-naphthyldiphenylmethyl, -methoxyphenyldiphenylmethyl, di(p-methoxyphenyl)phenylmethyl, tri(p-methoxyphenyl)methyl, 4-(4'- bromophenacyloxyphenyl)diphenylmethyl, 4,4',4"-tris(4,5-dichlorophthalimidophenyl)methyl, 4,4',4"-tris(levulinoyloxyphenyl)methyl, 4,4',4"-tris(benzoyloxyphenyl)methyl, 3-(imidazol-l- yl)bis(4',4"-dimethoxyphenyl)methyl, 1, l-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-l '-pyrenylmethyl, 9-anthryl, 9-(9-phenyl)xanthenyl, 9-(9-phenyl-10-oxo)anthryl, 1 ,3-benzodisulfuran-2-yl,
benzisothiazolyl S,S-dioxido, trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), dimethylisopropylsilyl (IPDMS), diethylisopropylsilyl (DEIPS), dimethylthexylsilyl, t- butyldimethylsilyl (TBDMS), ?-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), tribenzylsilyl, tri- -xylylsilyl, triphenylsilyl, diphenylmethylsilyl (DPMS), ?-butylmethoxyphenylsilyl (TBMPS), formate, benzoylformate, acetate, chloroacetate, dichloroacetate, trichloroacetate, trifluoroacetate, methoxyacetate, triphenylmethoxyacetate, phenoxyacetate, -chlorophenoxyacetate, 3- phenylpropionate, 4-oxopentanoate (levulinate), 4,4-(ethylenedithio)pentanoate
(levulinoyldithioacetal), pivaloate, adamantoate, crotonate, 4-methoxycrotonate, benzoate, p- phenylbenzoate, 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoate (mesitoate), alkyl methyl carbonate, 9-fluorenylmethyl carbonate (Fmoc), alkyl ethyl carbonate, alkyl 2,2,2-trichloroethyl carbonate (Troc), 2- (trimethylsilyl)ethyl carbonate (TMSEC), 2-(phenylsulfonyl) ethyl carbonate (Psec), 2- (triphenylphosphonio) ethyl carbonate (Peoc), alkyl isobutyl carbonate, alkyl vinyl carbonate alkyl allyl carbonate, alkyl -nitrophenyl carbonate, alkyl benzyl carbonate, alkyl p- methoxybenzyl carbonate, alkyl 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl carbonate, alkyl o-nitrobenzyl carbonate, alkyl -nitrobenzyl carbonate, alkyl S-benzyl thiocarbonate, 4-ethoxy-l-napththyl carbonate, methyl dithiocarbonate, 2-iodobenzoate, 4-azidobutyrate, 4-nitro-4-methylpentanoate, o- (dibromomethyl)benzoate, 2-formylbenzenesulfonate, 2-(methylthiomethoxy)ethyl, 4- (methylthiomethoxy)butyrate, 2-(methylthiomethoxymethyl)benzoate, 2,6-dichloro-4- methylphenoxyacetate, 2,6-dichloro-4-(l,l,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenoxyacetate, 2,4— bis(l, 1— dimethylpropyl)phenoxyacetate, chlorodiphenylacetate, isobutyrate, monosuccinoate, (E)-2- methyl-2-butenoate, o-(methoxyacyl)benzoate, a-naphthoate, nitrate, alkyl Ν,Ν,Ν',Ν'- tetramethylphosphorodiamidate, alkyl N-phenylcarbamate, borate, dimethylphosphinothioyl, alkyl 2,4-dinitrophenylsulfenate, sulfate, methanesulfonate (mesylate), benzylsulfonate, and tosylate (Ts).
[0093] In certain embodiments, the substituent present on an sulfur atom is an sulfur protecting group (also referred to as a thiol protecting group). Sulfur protecting groups include, but are not limited to, -Raa, -N(Rbb)2, -C(=0)SRaa, -C(=0)Raa, -C02Raa, -C(=0)N(Rbb)2, - C(=NRbb)Raa, -C(=NRbb)ORaa, -C(=NRbb)N(Rbb)2, -S(=0)Raa, -S02Raa, -Si(Raa)3 -P(RCC)2, - P(RCC)3, -P(=0)2Raa, -P(=0)(Raa)2, -P(=0)(ORcc)2, -P(=0)2N(Rbb)2, and -P(=0)(NRbb)2, wherein Raa, Rbb, and Rcc are as defined herein. Sulfur protecting groups are well known in the art and include those described in detail in Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1999, incorporated herein by reference.
[0094] "Compounds of the present invention", and equivalent expressions, are meant to embrace the compounds as hereinbefore described, in particular compounds according to any of the Formula herein recited and/or described, which expression includes the prodrugs, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates, e.g., hydrates, where the context so permits. Similarly, reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed, is meant to embrace their salts, and solvates, where the context so permits.
[0095] These and other exemplary substituents are described in more detail in the
Detailed Description, Examples, and claims. The invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the above exemplary listing of substituents.
Other definitions
[0096] "Pharmaceutically acceptable" means approved or approvable by a regulatory agency of the Federal or a state government or the corresponding agency in countries other than the United States, or that is listed in the U.S. Pharmacopoeia or other generally recognized pharmacopoeia for use in animals, and more particularly, in humans.
[0097] "Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to a salt of a compound of the invention that is pharmaceutically acceptable and that possesses the desired pharmacological activity of the parent compound. In particular, such salts are non-toxic may be inorganic or organic acid addition salts and base addition salts. Specifically, such salts include: (1) acid addition salts, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like; or formed with organic acids such as acetic acid, propionic acid, hexanoic acid, cyclopentanepropionic acid, glycolic acid, pyruvic acid, lactic acid, malonic acid, succinic acid, malic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tartaric acid, citric acid, benzoic acid, 3-(4-hydroxybenzoyl) benzoic acid, cinnamic acid, mandelic acid, methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, 1,2-ethane-disulfonic acid, 2 -hydroxy ethanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, 4-chlorobenzenesulfonic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, 4-toluenesulfonic acid, camphorsulfonic acid, 4-methylbicyclo[2.2.2]-oct-2-ene-l-carboxylic acid, glucoheptonic acid, 3-phenylpropionic acid, trimethylacetic acid, tertiary butylacetic acid, lauryl sulfuric acid, gluconic acid, glutamic acid, hydroxynaphthoic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, muconic acid, and the like; or (2) salts formed when an acidic proton present in the parent compound either is replaced by a metal ion, e.g., an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth ion, or an aluminum ion; or coordinates with an organic base such as ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N- methylglucamine and the like. Salts further include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the compound contains a basic functionality, salts of non toxic organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable cation" refers to an acceptable cationic counter-ion of an acidic functional group. Such cations are exemplified by sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium cations, and the like (see, e.g., Berge, et al, J. Pharm. Sci. 66(1): 1-79 (Jan."77) .
[0098] "Pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle" refers to a diluent, adjuvant, excipient or carrier with which a compound of the invention is administered.
[0099] "Pharmaceutically acceptable metabolically cleavable group" refers to a group which is cleaved in vivo to yield the parent molecule of the structural Formula indicated herein. Examples of metabolically cleavable groups include -COR, -COOR,-CONRR and -CH2OR radicals, where R is selected independently at each occurrence from alkyl, trialkylsilyl, carbocyclic aryl or carbocyclic aryl substituted with one or more of alkyl, halogen, hydroxy or alkoxy. Specific examples of representative metabolically cleavable groups include acetyl, methoxycarbonyl, benzoyl, methoxymethyl and trimethylsilyl groups.
[00100] "Prodrugs" refers to compounds, including derivatives of the compounds of the invention, which have cleavable groups and become by solvolysis or under physiological conditions the compounds of the invention that are pharmaceutically active in vivo. Such examples include, but are not limited to, choline ester derivatives and the like, N- alkylmorpholine esters and the like. Other derivatives of the compounds of this invention have activity in both their acid and acid derivative forms, but in the acid sensitive form often offers advantages of solubility, tissue compatibility, or delayed release in the mammalian organism (see, Bundgard, H., Design of Prodrugs, pp. 7-9, 21-24, Elsevier, Amsterdam 1985). Prodrugs include acid derivatives well know to practitioners of the art, such as, for example, esters prepared by reaction of the parent acid with a suitable alcohol, or amides prepared by reaction of the parent acid compound with a substituted or unsubstituted amine, or acid anhydrides, or mixed anhydrides. Simple aliphatic or aromatic esters, amides and anhydrides derived from acidic groups pendant on the compounds of this invention are particular prodrugs. In some cases it is desirable to prepare double ester type prodrugs such as (acyloxy)alkyl esters or
((alkoxycarbonyl)oxy)alkylesters. Particularly the Ci to Cs alkyl, C2-C8 alkenyl, C2-C8 alkynyl, aryl, C7-C12 substituted aryl, and C7-C12 arylalkyl esters of the compounds of the invention.
[00101] "Solvate" refers to forms of the compound that are associated with a solvent or water (also referred to as "hydrate"), usually by a solvolysis reaction. This physical association includes hydrogen bonding. Conventional solvents include water, ethanol, acetic acid and the like. The compounds of the invention may be prepared e.g. in crystalline form and may be solvated or hydrated. Suitable solvates include pharmaceutically acceptable solvates, such as hydrates, and further include both stoichiometric solvates and non-stoichiometric solvates. In certain instances the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. "Solvate" encompasses both solution-phase and isolable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates and methanolates.
[00102] A "subject" to which administration is contemplated includes, but is not limited to, humans (i.e., a male or female of any age group, e.g., a pediatric subject (e.g, infant, child, adolescent) or adult subject (e.g., young adult, middle-aged adult or senior adult)) and/or a non- human animal, e.g., a mammal such as primates (e.g., cynomolgus monkeys, rhesus monkeys), cattle, pigs, horses, sheep, goats, rodents, cats, and/or dogs. In certain embodiments, the subject is a human. In certain embodiments, the subject is a non-human animal. The terms "human", "patient" and "subject" are used interchangeably herein.
[00103] "Therapeutically effective amount" means the amount of a compound that, when administered to a subject for treating a disease, is sufficient to effect such treatment for the disease. The "therapeutically effective amount" can vary depending on the compound, the disease and its severity, and the age, weight, etc., of the subject to be treated.
[00104] "Preventing" or "prevention" refers to a reduction in risk of acquiring or developing a disease or disorder (i.e., causing at least one of the clinical symptoms of the disease not to develop in a subject not yet exposed to a disease-causing agent, or predisposed to the disease in advance of disease onset.
[00105] The term "prophylaxis" is related to "prevention", and refers to a measure or procedure the purpose of which is to prevent, rather than to treat or cure a disease. Non-limiting examples of prophylactic measures may include the administration of vaccines; the
administration of low molecular weight heparin to hospital patients at risk for thrombosis due, for example, to immobilization; and the administration of an anti-malarial agent such as chloroquine, in advance of a visit to a geographical region where malaria is endemic or the risk of contracting malaria is high.
[00106] "Treating" or "treatment" of any disease or disorder refers, in certain
embodiments, to ameliorating the disease or disorder (i.e., arresting the disease or reducing the manifestation, extent or severity of at least one of the clinical symptoms thereof). In another embodiment "treating" or "treatment" refers to ameliorating at least one physical parameter, which may not be discernible by the subject. In yet another embodiment, "treating" or
"treatment" refers to modulating the disease or disorder, either physically, (e.g., stabilization of a discernible symptom), physiologically, (e.g., stabilization of a physical parameter), or both. In a further embodiment, "treating" or "treatment" relates to slowing the progression of the disease.
[00107] As used herein, the term "isotopic variant" refers to a compound that contains unnatural proportions of isotopes at one or more of the atoms that constitute such compound. For example, an "isotopic variant" of a compound can contain one or more non-radioactive isotopes, such as for example, deuterium (2H or D), carbon-13 (13C), nitrogen-15 (15N), or the like. It will be understood that, in a compound where such isotopic substitution is made, the following atoms, where present, may vary, so that for example, any hydrogen may be 2H/D, any carbon may be 13C, or any nitrogen may be 15N, and that the presence and placement of such atoms may be determined within the skill of the art. Likewise, the invention may include the preparation of isotopic variants with radioisotopes, in the instance for example, where the resulting compounds may be used for drug and/or substrate tissue distribution studies. The radioactive isotopes tritium, i.e., 3H, and carbon-14, i.e., 14C, are particularly useful for this purpose in view of their ease of incorporation and ready means of detection. Further, compounds may be prepared that are substituted with positron emitting isotopes, such as nC, 18F, 150 and 13N, and would be useful in Positron Emission Topography (PET) studies for examining substrate receptor occupancy. All isotopic variants of the compounds provided herein, radioactive or not, are intended to be encompassed within the scope of the invention.
[00108] It is also to be understood that compounds that have the same molecular formula but differ in the nature or sequence of bonding of their atoms or the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed "isomers". Isomers that differ in the arrangement of their atoms in space are termed "stereoisomers".
[00109] Stereoisomers that are not mirror images of one another are termed
"diastereomers" and those that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other are termed "enantiomers". When a compound has an asymmetric center, for example, when it is bonded to four different groups, a pair of enantiomers is possible. An enantiomer can be characterized by the absolute configuration of its asymmetric center and is described by the R- and S-sequencing rules of Cahn and Prelog, or by the manner in which the molecule rotates the plane of polarized light and designated as dextrorotatory or levorotatory (i.e., as (+) or (-)-isomers respectively). A chiral compound can exist as either individual enantiomer or as a mixture thereof. A mixture containing equal proportions of the enantiomers is called a "racemic mixture".
[00110] "Tautomers" refer to compounds that are interchangeable forms of a particular compound structure, and that vary in the displacement of hydrogen atoms and electrons. Thus, two structures may be in equilibrium through the movement of π electrons and an atom (usually H). For example, enols and ketones are tautomers because they are rapidly interconverted by treatment with either acid or base. Another example of tautomerism is the aci- and nitro- forms of phenylnitromethane, which are likewise formed by treatment with acid or base.
Tautomeric forms may be relevant to the attainment of the optimal chemical reactivity and biological activity of a compound of interest.
[00111] As used herein a pure enantiomeric compound is substantially free from other enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound (i.e., in enantiomeric excess). In other words, an "S" form of the compound is substantially free from the "R" form of the compound and is, thus, in enantiomeric excess of the "R" form. The term "enantiomerically pure" or "pure enantiomer" denotes that the compound comprises more than 75% by weight, more than 80% by weight, more than 85% by weight, more than 90% by weight, more than 91% by weight, more than 92% by weight, more than 93% by weight, more than 94% by weight, more than 95% by weight, more than 96% by weight, more than 97% by weight, more than 98% by weight, more than 98.5% by weight, more than 99% by weight, more than 99.2% by weight, more than 99.5% by weight, more than 99.6% by weight, more than 99.7% by weight, more than 99.8% by weight or more than 99.9% by weight, of the enantiomer. In certain embodiments, the weights are based upon total weight of all enantiomers or stereoisomers of the compound.
[00112] As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "enantiomerically pure R- compound" refers to at least about 80% by weight R-compound and at most about 20% by weight S-compound, at least about 90% by weight R-compound and at most about 10% by weight S-compound, at least about 95% by weight R-compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, at least about 99% by weight R-compound and at most about 1% by weight S- compound, at least about 99.9% by weight R-compound or at most about 0.1% by weight S- compound. In certain embodiments, the weights are based upon total weight of compound.
[00113] As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "enantiomerically pure S- compound" or "S-compound" refers to at least about 80% by weight S-compound and at most about 20% by weight R-compound, at least about 90% by weight S-compound and at most about 10% by weight R-compound, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, at least about 99% by weight S-compound and at most about 1% by weight R-compound or at least about 99.9% by weight S-compound and at most about 0.1% by weight R-compound. In certain embodiments, the weights are based upon total weight of compound.
[00114] In the compositions provided herein, an enantiomerically pure compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate or prodrug thereof can be present with other active or inactive ingredients. For example, a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure R-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure R-compound. In certain embodiments, the enantiomerically pure R- compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight R- compound and at most about 5% by weight S-compound, by total weight of the compound. For example, a pharmaceutical composition comprising enantiomerically pure S-compound can comprise, for example, about 90% excipient and about 10% enantiomerically pure S-compound. In certain embodiments, the enantiomerically pure S-compound in such compositions can, for example, comprise, at least about 95% by weight S-compound and at most about 5% by weight R-compound, by total weight of the compound. In certain embodiments, the active ingredient can be formulated with little or no excipient or carrier.
[00115] The compounds of this invention may possess one or more asymmetric centers; such compounds can therefore be produced as individual (R)- or (S)- stereoisomers or as mixtures thereof.
[00116] Unless indicated otherwise, the description or naming of a particular compound in the specification and claims is intended to include both individual enantiomers and mixtures, racemic or otherwise, thereof. The methods for the determination of stereochemistry and the separation of stereoisomers are well-known in the art.
[00117] One having ordinary skill in the art of organic synthesis will recognize that the maximum number of heteroatoms in a stable, chemically feasible heterocyclic ring, whether it is aromatic or non aromatic, is determined by the size of the ring, the degree of unsaturation and the valence of the heteroatoms. In general, a heterocyclic ring may have one to four heteroatoms so long as the heteroaromatic ring is chemically feasible and stable.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
[00118] In certain aspects, provided herein are pharmaceutical compositions comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex.
[00119] In certain aspects, the bolaamphiphile complexes comprise one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound, metal or metal alloy capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
[00120] In further aspects, provided herein are novel magnetic bolavesicles comprising bolaamphiphilic compounds.
[00121] In further aspects, provided herein are novel formulations of magnetic
nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles.
[00122] In further aspects, provided herein are novel formulations and/or novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising of complexes of magnetic nanoparticles with bolaamphiphilic compounds or with bolaamhphile vesicles. In yet further aspect, the
formulations and/or compositions are useful for delivering drugs or imaging agents into the brain.
[00123] In another aspect, provided here are methods of delivering drugs or imaging agents into animal or human brain comprising the step of administering to the animal or human a pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
[00124] In one embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic complex comprises one bolaamphiphilic compound. In another embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic complex comprises two bolaamphiphilic compounds.
[00125] In one embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound consists of two hydrophilic headgroups linked through a long hydrophobic chain. In another embodiment, the hydrophilic headgroup is an amino containing group. In a specific embodiment, the hydrophilic headgroup is a tertiary or quaternary amino containing group.
[00126] In one particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula I:
HG2 L1 HG1
I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group; and
L1 is alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
[00127] In one embodiment, the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is a quaternary ammonium salt.
[00128] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
L1 is heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker comprising C, N, and O atoms; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
[00129] In another embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
I, L1 is
-0-L2-C(0)-0-(CH2)„4-0-C(0)-L3-0-, or
-0-L2-C(0)-0-(CH2)n5-0-C(0)-(CH2)n6-,
and wherein each L2 and L3 is C4-C20 alkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with Ci-Cs alkyl or hydroxy;
and n4, n5, and n6 is independently an integer from 4-20.
[00130] In one embodiment, each L2 and L3 is independently -C(R1)-C(OH)-CH2-
(CH=CH)-(CH2)n7-; R1 is Ci-Cs alkyl, and n7 is independently an integer from 4-20.
[00131] In another embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
I, L1 is -0-(CH2)nl-0-C(0)-(CH2)n2-C(0)-0-(CH2)n3-0-.
[00132] In another embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I, L1 is
-( ^)n9 J If ^(-),
o o
Linker AA
Figure imgf000038_0001
Linker BB
Figure imgf000038_0002
Linker CC or
Figure imgf000038_0003
Linker DD wherein:
each Z1 and Z2 is independently -C(R3)2-, -N(R3)- or -0-;
each Rla, Rlb, R3, and R4 is independently H or Ci-C8 alkyl;
each R2a and R2b is independently H , Ci-Cs alkyl, OH, or alkoxy;
each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
and wherein each methylene carbon is unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C4 alkyl; and each nl, n2, and n3 is independently an integer from 4-20.
[00133] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI:
HG2 Mn9 ][ (— )n11 HG1
o o
II
Figure imgf000039_0001
Figure imgf000039_0002
IV
Figure imgf000039_0003
V , or
Figure imgf000039_0004
VI
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group;
each Z1 and Z2 is independently -C(R3)2-, -N(R3)- or -0-;
each Rla, Rlb, R3, and R4 is independently H or Ci-C8 alkyl;
each R2a and R2b is independently H , Ci-C8 alkyl, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG1 or O-HG2; each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[00134] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 2-12. In another embodiment, n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 4-8. In a particular embodiment, each n9 and nl 1 is 7 or 1 1.
[00135] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each n8 and nl2 is independently 1, 2, 3, or 4. In a particular embodiment, each n8 and nl2 is 1.
[00136] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each R2a and R2b is independently H, OH, or alkoxy. In another embodiment, each R2a and R2b is independently H, OH, or OMe. In another embodiment, each R2a and R2b is independently-O-HG1 or O-HG2. In a particular embodiment, each R2a and R2b is OH.
[00137] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each Rla and Rlb is independently H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n- pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl. In a particular embodiment, each Rla and Rlb is independently n-pentyl.
[00138] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each dotted bond is a single bond. In another embodiment, each dotted bond is a double bond.
[00139] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, nlO is an integer from 2-16. In another embodiment, nlO is an integer from 2- 12. In a particular embodiment, nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
[00140] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula IV,
R4 is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl. In another embodiment, R4 is Me, or Et. In a particular embodiment, R4 is Me.
[00141] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each Z1 and Z2 is independently C(R3)2-, or -N(R3)-. In another embodiment, each Z1 and Z2 is independently C(R3)2-, or -N(R3)-; and each R3 is independently H, Me, Et, n- Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl. In a particular embodiment, R3 is H.
[00142] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula II,
III, IV, V, or VI, each Z1 and Z2 is -0-.
[00143] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, or IV, each HG1 and HG2 is independently selected from:
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000041_0002
wherein:
X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl; each R8 is independently
H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl, alkoxy, or carboxy;
ml is 0 or 1; and
each nl3, nl4, and nl5 is independently an integer from 1-20.
[00144] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, or rv, HG1 and HG2 are as defined above, and each ml is 0.
[00145] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, or rv, HG1 and HG2 are as defined above, and each ml is 1.
[00146] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, or rv, HG1 and HG2 are as defined above, and each nl3 is 1 or 2.
[00147] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, or rv, HG1 and HG2 are as defined above, and each nl4 and nl5 is independently 1, 2, 3,
4, or 5. In another embodiment, each nl4 and nl5 is independently 2 or 3.
[00148] In one particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vila, Vllb, VIIc, or Vlld:
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000042_0002
Figure imgf000042_0003
VI Ic
or
Figure imgf000042_0004
Vlld
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[00149] In another particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Villa, VHIb, VIIIc, or Vllld:
Figure imgf000043_0001
Villa
Figure imgf000043_0002
Vlllb
Figure imgf000043_0003
Vlllc
Figure imgf000043_0004
VI I Id
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[00150] In another particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula IXa, IXb, or IXc:
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000044_0002
IXb
Figure imgf000044_0003
IXc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[00151] In another particular embodiment, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Xa, Xb, or Xc:
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000045_0002
Xb
Figure imgf000045_0003
Xc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
[00152] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, each dotted bond is a single bond. In another embodiment, each dotted bond is a double bond.
[00153] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, nlO is an integer from 2-16.
[00154] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, nlO is an integer from 2-12.
[00155] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
[00156] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, each R5a, R5b, and R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl. [00157] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, each R5a, R5b, and R5c is independently unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl.
[00158] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, one of R5a, R5b, and R5c is Ci-C20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R6; and R6 is Ci-C20 alkyl.
[00159] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, two of R5a, R5b, and R5c are independently Ci-C20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R6; and R6 is C1-C20 alkyl. In one embodiment, R6 is Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl. In a particular embodiment, R6 is Me.
[00160] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, one of R5a, R5b, and R5c is Ci-C20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
[00161] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, two of R5a, R5b, and R5c are independently C1-C20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
[00162] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl.
[00163] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted pyridyl.
[00164] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or unsubstituted monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl.
[00165] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc X is substituted or unsubstituted
Figure imgf000046_0001
[00166] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, X is
Figure imgf000047_0001
substituted with one or more groups selected from alkoxy, acetyl, and substituted or unsubstituted Ph.
[00167] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, X is
Figure imgf000047_0002
[00168] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, X is -NMe2 or -N+Me3.
[00169] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, X is -N(Me)-CH2CH2-OAc or -N+(Me)2-CH2CH2- OAc.
[00170] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula
Vlla-VIId, Villa- Vllld, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc, X is a chitosanyl group; and the chitosanyl group is a poly-(D)glucosaminyl group with MW of 3800 to 20,000 Daltons, and is attached to the core via .
[00171] In one embodiment, the chitosanyl group is
Figure imgf000047_0003
and wherein each pi and p2 is independently an integer from 1-400; and each R7a is H or acyl. [00172] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, IV, V, VI, Vlla-VIIc, Villa- VIIIc, IXa-IXc and Xa-Xc, the bolaamphiphilic compound is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
[00173] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, IV, V, VI, Vlla-VIIc, Villa- VIIIc, IXa-IXc and Xa-Xc, the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt.
[00174] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, IV, V, VI, Vlla-VIIc, Villa- VIIIc, IXa-IXc and Xa-Xc, the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt with pharmaceutically acceptable alkyl halide or alkyl tosylate.
[00175] In one embodiment, with respect to the bolaamphiphilic compound of formula I,
II, III, IV, V, VI, Vlla-VIIc, Villa- VIIIc, IXa-IXc and Xa-Xc, the bolaamphiphilic compound is any one of the bolaambphilic compounds listed in Table 1.
[00176] In another specific aspect, provided herein are methods for incorporating magnetic nanoparticles in the bolavesicles. In one embodiment, the bolavasicle comporises one or more bolaamphilic compounds described herein.
[00177] In another specific aspect, provided herein are methods for brain-targeted drug delivery using the bolavesicles incorporated with magnetic nanoparticles.
[00178] In one embodiment, with respect to the method or the composition, the magnetic nanoparticle or MNP is Fe304.
[00179] In one embodiment, with respect to the method or the composition, the magnetic nanoparticle is a class of nanoparticle which can be manipulated using magnetic field. In one embodiment, the magnetic nanoparticle comprises magnetic elements. In one embodiment, the magnetic element is iron, nickel or cobalt or their chemical compounds.
[00180] In one embodiment, with respect to the method or the composition, the magnetic nanoparticle is a metal oxide. In another embodiment, MNP is ferrite nanoparticles. In another embodiment, just like non-magnetic oxide nanoparticles, the surface of ferrite nanoparticles is modified by surfactants, silicones or phosphoric acid derivatives to increase their stability in solution.
[00181] In one embodiment, with respect to the method or the composition, the magnetic nanoparticle is metallic nanoparticle. In one embodiment, the metallic core of the metallic nanoparticle is passivated by gentle oxidation, surfactants, polymers and precious metals.
[00182] In one embodiment, with respect to the method or the composition, the magnetic nanoparticle is a CoO nanoparticle. In an oxygen environment, Co nanoparticles form an anti- ferromagnetic CoO layer on the surface of the Co nanoparticle. Recently, work has explored the synthesis and exchange bias effect in these Co core CoO shell nanoparticles with a gold outer shell. Nanoparticles with a magnetic core consisting either of elementary Iron or Cobalt with a nonreactive shell made of graphene have been synthesized recently.[13] The advantages compared to ferrite or elemental nanoparticles are higher magnetization and higher stability in acidic and basic solution as well as organic solvents.
[00183] The Derivatives and Precursors disclosed can be prepared as illustrated in the
Schemes provided herein. The syntheses can involve initial construction of, for example, vernonia oil or direct functionalization of natural derivatives by organic synthesis manipulations such as, but not limiting to, epoxide ring opening. In those processes involving oxiranyl ring opening, the epoxy group is opened by the addition of reagents such as carboxylic acids or organic or inorganic nucleophiles. Such ring opening results in a mixture of two products in which the new group is introduced at either of the two carbon atoms of the epoxide moiety. This provides beta substituted alcohols in which the substitution position most remote from the CO group of the main aliphatic chain of the vernonia oil derivative is arbitrarily assigned as position 1, while the neighboring substituted carbon position is designated position 2. For simplicity purposes only, the Derivatives and Precursors shown herein may indicate structures with the hydroxy group always at position 2 but the Derivatives and Precursors wherein the hydroxy is at position 1 are also encompassed by the invention. Thus, a radical of the formula— CH(OH)— CH(R)— refers to the substitution of—OH at either the carbon closer to the CO group, designated position 2 or to the carbon at position 1. Moreover, with respect to the preparation of symmetrical bolaamphiphiles made via introducing the head groups through an epoxy moiety (e.g., as in vernolic acid) or a double bond (-C=C-) as in mono unsaturated fatty acids (e.g., oleic acid) a mixture of three different derivatives will be produced. In certain embodiments, vesicles are prepared using the mixture of unfractionated positional isomers. In one aspect of this embodiment, where one or more bolas are prepared from vernolic acid, and in which a hydroxy group as well as the head group introduced through an epoxy or a fatty acid with the head group introduced through a double bond (-C=C-), the bola used in vesicle preparation can actually be a mixture of three different positional isomers.
[00184] In other embodiments, the three different derivatives are isolated. Accordingly, the vesicles disclosed herein can be made from a mixture of the three isomers of each derivative or, in other embodiments, the individual isomers can be isolated and used for preparation of vesicles.
[00185] Symmetrical bolaamphiphiles can form relatively stable self aggregate vesicle structures by the use of additives such as cholesterol and cholesterol derivatives (e.g., cholesterol hemisuccinate, cholesterol oleyl ether, anionic and cationic derivatives of cholesterol and the like), or other additives including single headed amphiphiles with one, two or multiple aliphatic chains such as phospholipids, zwitterionic, acidic, or cationic lipids. Examples of zwitterionic lipids are phosphatidylcholines, phosphatidylethanol amines and sphingomyelins. Examples of acidic amphiphilic lipids are phosphatidylglycerols, phosphatidylserines, phosphatidylinositols, and phosphatidic acids. Examples of cationic amphipathic lipids are diacyl trimethylammonium propanes, diacyl dimethylammonium propanes, and stearylamines cationic amphiphiles such as spermine cholesterol carbamates, and the like, in optimum concentrations which fill in the larger spaces on the outer surfaces, and/or add additional hydrophilicity to the particles. Such additives may be added to the reaction mixture during formation of nanoparticles to enhance stability of the nanoparticles by filling in the void volumes of in the upper surface of the vesicle membrane.
[00186] Stability of nano vesicles according to the present disclosure can be demonstrated by dynamic light scattering (DLS) and transmission electron microscopy (TEM). For example, suspensions of the vesicles can be left to stand for 1, 5, 10, and 30 days to assess the stability of the nanoparticle solution/suspension and then analyzed by DLS and TEM.
[00187] The vesicles disclosed herein may encapsulate within their core the active agent, which in particular embodiments is selected from peptides, proteins, nucleotides and or non- polymeric agents. In certain embodiments, the active agent is also associated via one or more non-covalent interactions to the vesicular membrane on the outer surface and/or the inner surface, optionally as pendant decorating the outer or inner surface, and may further be incorporated into the membrane surrounding the core. In certain aspects, biologically active peptides, proteins, nucleotides or non-polymeric agents that have a net electric charge, may associate ionically with oppositely charged headgroups on the vesicle surface and/or form salt complexes therewith.
[00188] In particular aspects of these embodiments, additives which may be
bolaamphiphiles or single headed amphiphiles, comprise one or more branching alkyl chains bearing polar or ionic pendants, wherein the aliphatic portions act as anchors into the vesicle's membrane and the pendants (e.g., chitosan derivatives or polyamines or certain peptides) decorate the surface of the vesicle to enhance penetration through various biological barriers such as the intestinal tract and the BBB, and in some instances are also selectively hydrolyzed at a given site or within a given organ. The concentration of these additives is readily adjusted according to experimental determination.
[00189] In certain embodiments, the oral formulations of the present disclosure comprise agents that enhance penetration through the membranes of the GI tract and enable passage of intact nanoparticles containing the drug. These agents may be any of the additives mentioned above and, in particular aspects of these embodiment, include chitosan and derivatives thereof, serving as vehicle surface ligands, as decorations or pendants on the vesicles, or the agents may be excipients added to the formulation. [00190] In other embodiments, the nanoparticles and vesicles disclosed herein may comprise the fluorescent marker carboxyfluorescein (CF) encapsulated therein while in particular aspects, the nanoparticle and vesicles of the present disclosure may be decorated with one or more of PEG, e.g. PEG2000-vernonia derivatives as pendants. For example, two kinds of PEG- vernonia derivatives can be used: PEG-ether derivatives, wherein PEG is bound via an ether bond to the oxygen of the opened epoxy ring of, e.g., vernolic acid and PEG-ester derivatives, wherein PEG is bound via an ester bond to the carboxylic group of, e.g., vernolic acid.
[00191] In other embodiments, vesicles, made from synthetic amphiphiles, as well as liposomes, made from synthetic or natural phospholipids, substantially (or totally) isolate the therapeutic agent from the environment allowing each vesicle or liposome to deliver many molecules of the therapeutic agent. Moreover, the surface properties of the vesicle or liposome can be modified for biological stability, enhanced penetration through biological barriers and targeting, independent of the physico-chemical properties of the encapsulated drug.
[00192] In still other embodiments, the headgroup is selected from: (i) choline or thiocholine, O-alkyl, N-alkyl or ester derivatives thereof; (ii) non-aromatic amino acids with functional side chains such as glutamic acid, aspartic acid, lysine or cysteine, or an aromatic amino acid such as tyrosine, tryptophan, phenylalanine and derivatives thereof such as levodopa (3, 4-dihydroxy -phenylalanine) and p-aminophenylalanine; (iii) a peptide or a peptide derivative that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme at a diseased site selected from enkephalin, N-acetyl- ala-ala, a peptide that constitutes a domain recognized by beta and gamma secretases, and a peptide that is recognized by stromelysins; (iv) saccharides such as glucose, mannose and ascorbic acid; and (v) other compounds such as nicotine, cytosine, lobeline, polyethylene glycol, a cannabinoid, or folic acid.
[00193] In further embodiments, nano-sized particle and vesicles disclosed herein further comprise at least one additive for one or more of targeting purposes, enhancing permeability and increasing the stability the vesicle or particle. Such additives, in particular aspects, may selected from from: (i) a single headed amphiphilic derivative comprising one, two or multiple aliphatic chains, preferably two aliphatic chains linked to a midsection/spacer region such as— H— (CH2)2~N~(CH2)2~N~, or ~0~(CH2)2~N~(CH2)2~0~, and a sole headgroup, which may be a selectively cleavable headgroup or one containing a polar or ionic selectively cleavable group or moiety, attached to the N atom in the middle of said midsection. In other asepcts, the additive can be selected from among cholesterol and cholesterol derivatives such as cholesteryl hemmisuccinate; phospholipids, zwitterionic, acidic, or cationic lipids; chitosan and chitosan derivatives, such as vernolic acid-chitosan conjugate, quaternized chitosan, chitosan- polyethylene glycol (PEG) conjugates, chitosan-polypropylene glycol (PPG) conjugates, chitosan N-conjugated with different amino acids, carboxyalkylated chitosan, sulfonyl chitosan, carbohydrate-branched N-(carboxymethylidene) chitosan and N-(carboxymethyl) chitosan;
polyamines such as protamine, polylysine or polyarginine; ligands of specific receptors at a target site of a biological environment such as nicotine, cytisine, lobeline, 1 -glutamic acid MK801, morphine, enkephalins, benzodiazepines such as diazepam (valium) and librium, dopamine agonists, dopamine antagonists tricyclic antidepressants, muscarinic agonists, muscarinic antagonists, cannabinoids and arachidonyl ethanol amide; polycationic polymers such as polyethylene amine; peptides that enhance transport through the BBB such as OX 26, transferrins, polybrene, histone, cationic dendrimer, synthetic peptides and polymyxin B nonapeptide (PMBN); monosaccharides such as glucose, mannose, ascorbic acid and derivatives thereof; modified proteins or antibodies that undergo absorptive-mediated or receptor-mediated transcytosis through the blood-brain barrier, such as bradykinin B2 agonist RMP-7 or monoclonal antibody to the transferrin receptor; mucoadhesive polymers such as glycerides and steroidal detergents; and Ca2+ chelators. The aforementioned head groups on the additives designed for one or more of targeting purposes and enhancing permeability may also be a head group, preferably on an asymmetric bolaamphiphile wherein the other head group is another moiety, or the head group on both sides of a symmetrical bolaamphiphile. In a further embodiment the bolaamphiphile head groups that comprise the vesicles membranes can interact with the active agents to be encapsulated to be delivered in to the brain and brain sites, and or other targeted sites, by ionic interactions to enhance the % encapsulation via complexation and well as passive encapsulation within the vesicles core. Further the formulation may contain other additives within the vehicles membranes to further enhance the degree of encapsulation of the active agents by interactions other than ionic interactions such as polar or hydrophobic interactions.
[00194] In other embodiments, nano-sized particle and vesicles discloser herein may comprises at least one biologically active agent is selected from: (i) a natural or synthetic peptide or protein such as analgesics peptides from the enkephalin class, insulin, insulin analogs, oxytocin, calcitonin, tyrotropin releasing hormone, follicle stimulating hormone, luteinizing hormone, vasopressin and vasopressin analogs, catalase, interleukin-II, interferon, colony stimulating factor, tumor necrosis factor (TNF), melanocyte-stimulating hormone, superoxide dismutase, glial cell derived neurotrophic factor (GDNF) or the Gly-Leu-Phe (GLF) families; (ii) nucleosides and polynucleotides selected from DNA or RNA molecules such as small interfering RNA (siRNA) or a DNA plasmid; (iii) antiviral and antibacterial; (iv) antineoplastic and chemotherapy agents such as cyclosporin, doxorubicin, epirubicin, bleomycin, cisplatin, carboplatin, vinca alkaloids, e.g. vincristine, Podophyllotoxin, taxanes, e.g. Taxol and Docetaxel, and topoisomerase inhibitors, e.g. irinotecan, topotecan.
[00195] Additional embodiments within the scope provided herein are set forth in non-limiting fashion elsewhere herein and in the examples. It should be understood that these examples are for illustrative purposes only and are not to be construed as limiting in any manner.
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
[00196] In another aspect, the invention provides a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of Formula I or a complex thereof.
[00197] When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds provided herein are typically administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition. Such compositions can be prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
[00198] In certain embodiments, with respect to the pharmaceutical composition, the carrier is a parenteral carrier, oral or topical carrier.
[00199] The present invention also relates to a compound or pharmaceutical composition of compound according to Formula I; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof for use as a pharmaceutical or a medicament.
[00200] Generally, the compounds provided herein are administered in a therapeutically effective amount. The amount of the compound actually administered will typically be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
[00201] The pharmaceutical compositions provided herein can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. Depending on the intended route of delivery, the compounds provided herein are preferably formulated as either injectable or oral compositions or as salves, as lotions or as patches all for transdermal administration.
[00202] The compositions for oral administration can take the form of bulk liquid solutions or suspensions, or bulk powders. More commonly, however, the compositions are presented in unit dosage forms to facilitate accurate dosing. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Typical unit dosage forms include prefilled, premeasured ampules or syringes of the liquid compositions or pills, tablets, capsules or the like in the case of solid compositions. In such compositions, the compound is usually a minor component (from about 0.1 to about 50% by weight or preferably from about 1 to about 40% by weight) with the remainder being various vehicles or carriers and processing aids helpful for forming the desired dosing form.
[00203] Liquid forms suitable for oral administration may include a suitable aqueous or nonaqueous vehicle with buffers, suspending and dispensing agents, colorants, flavors and the like. Solid forms may include, for example, any of the following ingredients, or compounds of a similar nature: a binder such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; an excipient such as starch or lactose, a disintegrating agent such as alginic acid, Primogel, or corn starch; a lubricant such as magnesium stearate; a glidant such as colloidal silicon dioxide; a sweetening agent such as sucrose or saccharin; or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate, or orange flavoring.
[00204] Injectable compositions are typically based upon injectable sterile saline or phosphate-buffered saline or other injectable carriers known in the art. As before, the active compound in such compositions is typically a minor component, often being from about 0.05 to 10% by weight with the remainder being the injectable carrier and the like.
[00205] Transdermal compositions are typically formulated as a topical ointment or cream containing the active ingredient(s), generally in an amount ranging from about 0.01 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 20% by weight, preferably from about 0.1 to about 10% by weight, and more preferably from about 0.5 to about 15% by weight. When formulated as a ointment, the active ingredients will typically be combined with either a paraffinic or a water-miscible ointment base. Alternatively, the active ingredients may be formulated in a cream with, for example an oil-in-water cream base. Such transdermal formulations are well-known in the art and generally include additional ingredients to enhance the dermal penetration of stability of the active ingredients or the formulation. All such known transdermal formulations and ingredients are included within the scope provided herein.
[00206] The compounds provided herein can also be administered by a transdermal device.
Accordingly, transdermal administration can be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir or porous membrane type, or of a solid matrix variety.
[00207] The above-described components for orally administrable, injectable or topically administrable compositions are merely representative. Other materials as well as processing techniques and the like are set forth in Part 8 of Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 17th edition, 1985, Mack Publishing Company, Easton, Pennsylvania, which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00208] The above-described components for orally administrable, injectable, or topically administrable compositions are merely representative. Other materials as well as processing techniques and the like are set forth in Part 8 of Remington 's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 21st edition, 2005, Publisher: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, which is incorporated herein by reference.
[00209] The compounds of this invention can also be administered in sustained release forms or from sustained release drug delivery systems. A description of representative sustained release materials can be found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences.
[00210] The present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable formulations of compounds of Formula I. In certain embodiments, the formulation comprises water. In another embodiment, the formulation comprises a cyclodextrin derivative. In certain embodiments, the formulation comprises hexapropyl-P-cyclodextrin. In a more particular embodiment, the formulation comprises hexapropyl-P-cyclodextrin (10-50% in water).
[00211] The present invention also relates to the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of compounds of Formula I. The acids which are used to prepare the pharmaceutically acceptable salts are those which form non-toxic acid addition salts, i.e. salts containing pharmacologically acceptable aniovs such as the hydrochloride, hydroiodide, hydrobromide, nitrate, sulfate, bisulfate, hosphate, acetate, lactate, citrate, tartrate, succinate, maleate, fumarate, benzoate, para-toluenesulfonate, and the like.
[00212] The following formulation examples illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions that may be prepared in accordance with this invention. The present invention, however, is not limited to the following pharmaceutical compositions.
Formulation 1 - Injection
[00213] A compound of the invention may be dissolved or suspended in a buffered sterile saline injectable aqueous medium to a concentration of approximately 5 mg/mL.
METHODS OF TREATMENT
[00214] Bolaamphiphilic vesicles (bolavesicles) may have certain advantages over conventional liposomes as potential vehicles for drug delivery. Bolavesicles have thinner membranes than comparable liposomal bilayer, and therefore possess bigger inner volume and hence higher encapsulation capacity than liposomes of the same diameter. Moreover,
bolavesicles are more physically-stable than conventional liposomes, but can be destabilized in a triggered fashion (e.g., by hydrolysis of the headgroups using a specific enzymatic reaction) thus allowing controlled release of the encapsulated material at the site of action (i.e., drug targeting)8.
[00215] In this study, MNPs were embedded for the first time in bolavesicles, and their biophysical properties and cell permeation profiles were investigated. The inventors
hypothesized that incorporation of MNPs in the bolavesicles will allow more efficient control of their body disposition using a magnetic field and will increase their brain targeting. The objective of this study was to generate magnetic bolavesicles, to characterize them and their interaction with membranes, and to investigate in vitro their potential for brain-targeted delivery using the b.End3 brain endothelial cell line model of the BBB. Indeed, our results point to significant modulation of bolavesicle properties following insertion of the MNPs. In particular, the inventors find that the new hybrid magnetic vesicles exhibit more pronounced membrane interactions and more effective uptake into brain endothelial cells compared to non-magnetic bolavesicles counterparts, underscoring the potential of magnetic bolavesicles as a new vehicle for brain- targeted drug delivery and diagnostics.
GENERAL SYNTHETIC PROCEDURES
[00216] The compounds provided herein can be purchased or prepared from readily available starting materials using the following general methods and procedures. See, e.g., Synthetic Schemes below. It will be appreciated that where typical or preferred process conditions (i.e., reaction temperatures, times, mole ratios of reactants, solvents, pressures, etc.) are given, other process conditions can also be used unless otherwise stated. Optimum reaction conditions may vary with the particular reactants or solvent used, but such conditions can be determined by one skilled in the art by routine optimization procedures.
[00217] Additionally, as will be apparent to those skilled in the art, conventional protecting groups may be necessary to prevent certain functional groups from undergoing undesired reactions. The choice of a suitable protecting group for a particular functional group as well as suitable conditions for protection and deprotection are well known in the art. For example, numerous protecting groups, and their introduction and removal, are described in T. W. Greene and P. G. M. Wuts, Protecting Groups in Organic Synthesis, Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1991, and references cited therein.
[00218] The compounds provided herein may be isolated and purified by known standard procedures. Such procedures include (but are not limited to) recrystallization, column chromatography or HPLC. The following schemes are presented with details as to the preparation of representative substituted biarylamides that have been listed herein. The compounds provided herein may be prepared from known or commercially available starting materials and reagents by one skilled in the art of organic synthesis.
[00219] The enantiomerically pure compounds provided herein may be prepared according to any techniques known to those of skill in the art. For instance, they may be prepared by chiral or asymmetric synthesis from a suitable optically pure precursor or obtained from a racemate by any conventional technique, for example, by chromatographic resolution using a chiral column, TLC or by the preparation of diastereoisomers, separation thereof and regeneration of the desired enantiomer. See, e.g., "Enantiomers, Racemates and Resolutions," by J. Jacques, A. Collet, and S.H. Wilen, (Wiley-Interscience, New York, 1981); S.H. Wilen, A. Collet, and J. Jacques, Tetrahedron, 2725 (1977); E.L. Eliel Stereochemistry of Carbon Compounds (McGraw-Hill, NY, 1962); and S.H. Wilen Tables of Resolving Agents and Optical Resolutions 268 (E.L. Eliel ed., Univ. of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, IN, 1972, Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, Ernest L. Eliel, Samuel H. Wilen and Lewis N. Manda (1994 John Wiley & Sons, Inc.), and Stereoselective Synthesis A Practical Approach, Mihaly Nogradi (1995 VCH Publishers, Inc., NY, NY).
[00220] In certain embodiments, an enantiomerically pure compound of formula (1) may be obtained by reaction of the racemate with a suitable optically active acid or base. Suitable acids or bases include those described in Bighley et ah, 1995, Salt Forms of Drugs and
Adsorption, in Encyclopedia of Pharmaceutical Technology, vol. 13, Swarbrick & Boylan, eds., Marcel Dekker, New York; ten Hoeve & H. Wynberg, 1985, Journal of Organic Chemistry 50:4508-4514; Dale & Mosher, 1973, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 95:512; and CRC Handbook of Optical Resolution via Diastereomeric Salt Formation, the contents of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
[00221] Enantiomerically pure compounds can also be recovered either from the crystallized diastereomer or from the mother liquor, depending on the solubility properties of the particular acid resolving agent employed and the particular acid enantiomer used. The identity and optical purity of the particular compound so recovered can be determined by polarimetry or other analytical methods known in the art. The diasteroisomers can then be separated, for example, by chromatography or fractional crystallization, and the desired enantiomer regenerated by treatment with an appropriate base or acid. The other enantiomer may be obtained from the racemate in a similar manner or worked up from the liquors of the first separation.
[00222] In certain embodiments, enantiomerically pure compound can be separated from racemic compound by chiral chromatography. Various chiral columns and eluents for use in the separation of the enantiomers are available and suitable conditions for the separation can be empirically determined by methods known to one of skill in the art. Exemplary chiral columns available for use in the separation of the enantiomers provided herein include, but are not limited to CHIRALCEL® OB, CHIRALCEL® OB-H, CHIRALCEL® OD, CHIRALCEL® OD-H, CHIRALCEL® OF, CHIRALCEL® OG, CHIRALCEL® OJ and CHIRALCEL® OK.
[00223] ABBREVIATIONS
BBB, blood brain barrier
BCECs, brain capillary endothelial cells
CF, carboxyfluorescein
CHEMS, cholesteryl hemisuccinate
CHOL, cholesterol
Cryo-TEM, Cryo-transmission electron microscope
DAPI, 4',6- diamidino-2-phenylindole
DDS, drug delivery system
DLS, dynamic light scattering
DMPC, 1 ,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine
DMPE, 1 ,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine
DMPG,l ,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phospho-(l'-rac-glycerol)
EPR, electron paramagnetic resonance
FACS, fluorescence-activated cell sorting
FCR, fluorescence colorimetric response
GUVs, giant unilamellar vesicles
HPLC, high performance liquid chromatography
IR, infrared
MNPs, Magnetic Nanoparticles
MRI, magnetic resonance imaging
NMR, nuclear magnetic resonance
NPs, nanoparticles
PBS, phosphate buffered saline
PC, phosphatidylcholine
PDA, polydiacetylene.
TMA-DPH, l-(4 trimethylammoniumphenyl)-6-phenyl-l,3,5-hexatriene
Example 1
Bolaamphiphile synthesis [00224] The boloamphiphles or bolaamphiphilic compounds of the invention can be synthesized following the procedures described previously 5'6.
[00225] Briefly, the carboxylic group of methyl vernolate or vernolic acid was interacted with aliphatic diols to obtain bisvernolesters. Then the epoxy group of the vernolate moiety, located on C12 and CI 3 of the aliphatic chain of vernolic acid, was used to introduce two ACh headgroups on the two vicinal carbons obtained after the opening of the oxirane ring. For GLH- 20 (Table 1), the ACh head group was attached to the vernolate skeleton through the nitrogen atom of the choline moiety. The bolaamphiphile was prepared in a two-stage synthesis: First, opening of the epoxy ring with a haloacetic acid and, second, quaternization with the N,N- dimethylamino ethyl acetate. For GLH-19 (Table 1) that contains an ACh head group attached to the vernolate skeleton through the acetyl group, the bolaamphiphile was prepared in a three-stage synthesis, including opening of the epoxy ring with glutaric acid, then esterification of the free carboxylic group with N,N-dimethyl amino ethanol and the final product was obtained by quaternization of the head group, using methyl iodide followed by exchange of the iodide ion by chloride using an ion exchange resin.
[00226] Each bolaamphiphile was characterized by mass spectrometry, NMR and IR spectroscopy. The purity of the two bolaamphiphiles was >97% as determined by HPLC.
[00227] Materials. Iron(III) acetylacetonate (Fe(acac)3), diphenyl ether, 1,2- hexadecanediol, oleic acid, oleylamine, and carboxyfluorescein (CF) were purchased from Sigma Aldrich (Rehovot, Israel). Chloroform and ethanol were purchased from Bio-Lab Ltd. Jerusalem, Israel. l,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phospho-(l'-rac-glycerol) (DMPG), 1,2-dimyristoyl-sn- glycero-3-phosphoethanolamine (DMPE), l,2-dimyristoyl-sn-glycero-3-phosphocholine
(DMPC), cholesterol (CHOL), cholesteryl hemisuccinate (CHEMS) were purchased from Avanti Lipids (Alabaster, AL, USA), The diacetylenic monomer 10,12- tricosadiynoic acid was purchased from Alfa Aesar (Karlsruhe, Germany), and purified by dissolving the powder in chloroform, filtering the resulting solution through a 0.45 μιη nylon filter (Whatman Inc., Clifton, NJ, USA), and evaporation of the solvent. l-(4 trimethylammoniumphenyl)-6-phenyl- 1,3,5- hexatriene (TMA-DPH) was purchased from Molecular Probes Inc. (Eugene, OR, USA).
SYNTHESIS OF REPRESENTATIVE BOLAAMPHIPHILIC COMPOUNDS
[00228] The synthesis bolaamphiphilic compounds of this invention can be carried out in accordance with the methods described previously (Chemistry and Physics of Lipids 2008, 153, 85-97; Journal of Liposome Research 2010, 20, 147-59; WO2002/05501 1; WO2003/047499; or WO2010/128504) and using the appropriate reagents, starting materials, and purification methods known to those skilled in the art. Several representative bolaamphiphilic compounds of the invention, which are prepared in according the methods described herein or can be prepared following the methods described in the literature or following the methods known to those skilled in the art, are given in Table 1.
[00229] Table 1 : Representative Bolaamphiphiles
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000065_0001
a - an intermediate
Example 2
Synthesis of Magnetic Nanoparticles
[00230] Fe(acac)3 (2 mmol) was mixed in phenyl ether (20 mL) with 1,2-hexadecanediol
(10 mmol), oleic acid (6 mmol), and oleylamine (6 mmol) under argon and was heated to reflux for 30 min. After cooling to room temperature, the dark-brown mixture was treated with ethanol under air, and a dark-brown material was precipitated from the solution. The product was dissolved in chloroform in the presence of oleic acid (2 mmol) and oleylamine (2 mmol) and reprecipitated with ethanol to give 4-nm Fe304 nanoparticles.
Example 3
Bolavesicle preparation and characterization
[00231] Bolaamphiphiles, cholesterol, and CHMES (2: 1 : 1 mole ratio) were dissolved in chloroform for GLH-20 or a mixture of chloroform and ethanol for GLH-19. For the MNPs- containing formulations, 0.5 mg magnetic nanoparticles dispersed in chloroform were added to the mix. The solvents were evaporated under vacuum and the resultant thin films were hydrated in 0.2 mg/mL CF solution in PBS and probe-sonicated (Vibra-Cell VCX130 sonicator, Sonics and Materials Inc., Newtown, CT, USA) with amplitude 20%, pulse on: 15 sec, pulse off: 10 sec to achieve homogenous vesicle dispersions. Vesicle size and zeta potential were determined using a Zetasizer Nano ZS (Malvern Instruments, UK).
Spectral Characterization
Example 4
Electron paramagnetic resonance (EPR)
[00232] EPR spectra of MNPs or of the MNPs-embedded bolavesicles resuspended in PBS were obtained using a Bruker EMX-220 X-band (υ~9.4 GHz) EPR spectrometer equipped with an Oxford Instruments ESR 900 temperature accessories and an Agilent 53150A frequency counter. Spectra were recorded at room temperature with the non-saturating incident microwave power 20 mW and the 100 KHz magnetic field modulation of 0.2 mT amplitude. Processing of EPR spectra, determination of spectral parameters were done using Bruker WI -EPR software.
Example 5
Cryogenic transmission electron microscopy (cryo-TEM)
[00233] Specimens studied by cryo-TEM were prepared. Sample solutions (4 μΕ) were deposited on a glow discharged, 300 mesh, lacey carbon copper grids (Ted Pella, Redding, CA, USA). The excess liquid was blotted and the specimen was vitrified in a Leica EM GP vitrification system in which the temperature and relative humidity are controlled. The samples were examined at -180 °C using a FEI Tecnai 12 G2 TWIN TEM equipped with a Gatan 626 cold stage, and the images were recorded (Gatan model 794 charge-coupled device camera) at 120 kV in low-dose mode.
Assays
Example 6
Lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) assay
[00234] Lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles (PDA/DMPC 3:2, mole ratio) were prepared by dissolving the lipid components in chloroform/ ethanol and drying together in vacuo. Vesicles were subsequently prepared in DDW by probe-sonication of the aqueous mixture at 70°C for 3 min. The vesicle samples were then cooled at room temperature for an hour and kept at 4°C overnight. The vesicles were then polymerized using irradiation at 254 nm for 10-20 s, with the resulting emulsions exhibiting an intense blue appearance. PDA fluorescence was measured in 96-well microplates (Greiner Bio-One GmbH, Frickenhausen, Germany) on a Fluoroscan Ascent fluorescence plate reader (Thermo Vantaa, Finland). All measurements were performed at room temperature at 485 nm excitation and 555 nm emission using LP filters with normal slits. Acquisition of data was automatically performed every 5 min for 60 min. Samples comprised 30 μΐ, of DMPC/PDA vesicles and 5μΙ, bolaamphiphilic vesicles assembled with MNPs, followed by addition of 30 μΐ. 50 mM Tris-base buffer (pH 8.0).
[00235] A quantitative value for the increasing of the fluorescence intensity within the
PDA/PC-labeled vesicles is given by the fluorescence colorimetric response (%FCR), which is defined as follows27:
Eq. 1. %FCR = [(Fi-F0)/F100] ' 100
[00236] Where Fi is the fluorescence emission of the lipid/PDA vesicles after addition of the tested membrane-active compounds, Fo is the fluorescence of the control sample (without addition of the compounds), and Fioo is the fluorescence of a sample heated to produce the highest fluorescence emission of the red PDA phase minus the fluorescence of the control sample.
Example 7
Fluorescence anisotropy
[00237] Lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles (PDA/DMPC 3:2, mole ratio) were prepared by dissolving the lipid components in chloroform/ ethanol and drying together in vacuo. Vesicles were subsequently prepared in DDW by probe-sonication of the aqueous mixture at 70°C for 3 min. The vesicle samples were then cooled at room temperature for an hour and kept at 4°C overnight. The vesicles were then polymerized using irradiation at 254 nm for 10-20 s, with the resulting emulsions exhibiting an intense blue appearance. PDA fluorescence was measured in 96-well microplates (Greiner Bio-One GmbH, Frickenhausen, Germany) on a Fluoroscan Ascent fluorescence plate reader (Thermo Vantaa, Finland). All measurements were performed at room temperature at 485 nm excitation and 555 nm emission using LP filters with normal slits. Acquisition of data was automatically performed every 5 min for 60 min. Samples comprised 30 μΐ^ of DMPC/PDA vesicles and 5μ1^ bolaamphiphilic vesicles assembled with MNPs, followed by addition of 30 μΐ, 50 mM Tris-base buffer (pH 8.0).
Example 8
Cell culture
[00238] b.End3 immortalized mouse brain capillary endothelium cells were kindly provided by Prof. Philip Lazarovici (Institute for Drug Research, School of Pharmacy, The Hebrew University of Jerusalem, Israel). The b.End3 cells were cultured in DMEM medium supplemented with 10% fetal bovine serum, 2 mM L-Glutamine, 100 IU/mL penicillin and 100 μg/mL streptomycin (Biological Industries Ltd., Beit Haemek, Israel). The cells were maintained in an incubator at 37°C in a humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2.
Example 9
Internalization of CF by the cells in vitro
[00239] b.End3 cells were grown on 24-well plates or on coverslips (for FACS and fluorescence microscopy analysis, respectively). The medium was replaced with culture medium without serum and CF solution, or tested bolavesicles (equivalent to 0.5 μg/mL CF), or equivalent volume of the medium were added to the cells and incubated for 5 hr at 4°C or at 37°C. At the end of the incubation, cells were extensively washed with complete medium and with PBS, and were either detached from the plates using trypsin-EDTA solution (Biological Industries Ltd., Beit Haemek, Israel) and analyzed by FACS (FACSCalibur Flow Cytometer, BD Biosciences, USA), or fixed with 2.5% formaldehyde in PBS, washed twice with PBS, mounted on slides using Mowiol-based mounting solution and analyzed using a FV1000-LX81 confocal microscope (Olympus, Tokyo, Japan) equipped with 60x objective. All the images were acquired using the same imaging settings and were not corrected or modified.
Example 10
Live confocal imaging
[00240] b.End3 cells were grown on 24-well plates, after 24 hr, the medium was replaced with culture medium without serum and CF solution, or studied bolavesicles (equivalent to 0.5 μg/mL CF), or equivalent volume of the medium were added to the cells and incubated for 5 hr in an incubator at 37°C in a humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. At the end of the incubation period, the cells were washed with growth medium and with PBS. The nucleus was stained with 4',6- diamidino-2-phenylindole (DAPI, KPL Ltd., MD, USA; 100 μg/mL in PBS). Subsequently, the cells were detached from the plates using Trypsin-EDTA solution and washed again with PBS. Live imaging was performed using a Zeiss LSM 510-NLO system with an Axiovert 200M inverted microscope (Carl Zeiss Inc., Germany) tuned to 405 nm and 63x 1.4 NA Zeiss Plan- Apochromat oil immersion objective. Videos were recorded without a magnet, and with a magnet placed on different sides of the well.
Example 11
Statistical analysis [00241] The data are presented as mean and standard deviations (SD) or standard errors of mean (SEM). Statistical differences between the control and the studied formulations were analyzed using ANOVA followed by Dunnett post-test using InStat 3.0 software (GraphPad Software Inc., La Jolla, CA, USA). P values of less than 0.05 were defined as statistically significant.
Example 12
Magnetic bolavesicle characterization
[00242] Two representative bolaamphiphiles, GLH-19 and GLH-20 (Table 1) were used in this study. Both compounds have cationic headgroups derived from acetylcholine (ACh): GLH- 20 that can be cleaved by the cholinesterase enzymes, and GLH-19 that is not cleavable by these enzymes. These two bolaamphiphiles can form spherical vesicles that deliver encapsulated markers across biological barriers such as the cell membrane8 and the blood-brain barrier6. In the present study the inventors compared these two bolaamphiphiles for their ability to deliver encapsulated nanoparticles across the cell membrane with the thought of determining which of these two bolaamphiphile may be more adequate to deliver encapsulated nanoparticle into the brain for imaging or treatment purposes.
[00243] To assemble magnetic bolaamphiphile vesicles the inventors first synthesized uniform-sized Fe304 MNPs (Figure 1 A) coated with a hydrophobic layer to prevent aggregation. The MNPs were then dispersed in an organic solution containing bolaamphiphiles GLH-19 or GLH-20 and lipid stabilizers (cholesterol and cholesteryl hemisuccinate), followed by drying, dissolution in buffer, and probe-sonication, resulting in formation of magnetic bolavesicles. Figure 1B-C and Table 2 present experimental data designed to characterize the magnetic bolavesicles. In particular, the inventors aimed to evaluate whether the MNPs were encapsulated within the bolaamphiphile vesicles, and to what degree the co-assembly altered the bolavesicles' properties.
[00244] Table 2: Bolavesicle sizes and surface charges
Figure imgf000069_0001
[00245] Table 2 depicts bolavesicle size distributions (with and without embedded MNPs) determined by dynamic light scattering (DLS), and the respective zeta potential values of the prepared vesicles. Table 1 indicates that the MNPs co-assembled with the bolaamphiphiles and lipids did not significantly modify vesicle size. However, in both types of bolavesicles
(comprising of GLH-19 and GLH-20 bolaamphiphiles, respectively) inclusion of MNPs reduced the zeta-potential, suggesting that association of the MNPs reduced the exposure of the positive surface charge, likely due to reorganization of the lipids/bolaamphiphile constituents.
[00246] Cryogenic -transmission electron microscopy (cryo-TEM) experiments further highlight the structural properties of the magnetic bolavesicles (Figure IB). In particular, the representative cryo-TEM images in Figure IB reveal distinct distributions of the MNPs in the vesicles, depending on the bolaamphiphile composition. Specifically, in case of GLH-19 bolavesicles, the MNPs appear to localize close to the vesicle interface, with some MNPs present outside of the bolavesicle (Figure IB). In contrast, Figure IB shows encapsulation of the MNPs inside the GLH-20 bolavesicles. The distinct MNP/bolavesicle associations most likely reflect the different chemical structures of the bolaamphiphiles. Specifically, the positively-charged choline moiety in GLH-19 is located at the tip of the alkyl side-chain (Table 1). The repulsion between the positive groups at the vesicle interface might allow the hydrophobic MNPs to penetrate and reside within the bolaamphiphile layer, as depicted in Figure IB. In case of GLH- 20, the choline is located further down in the bolaamphiphile alkyl chain (Table 1), resulting in a more condensed bolaaphiphile layer. In consequence, the MNPs appear to be localized inside the bolavesicle core rather than inside the bolaamphiphile monolayer.
[00247] The electron paramagnetic resonance (EPR) results in Figure 1 C confirm that the
MNPs are embedded within the bolavesicles, and that the MNPs are exposed to different molecular environments in the GLH-19 and GLH-20 bolavesicles, respectively. EPR spectra of aqueous solutions containing the control MNPs not associated with bolavesicles (Figure 1C, broken-line traces) consist of an intense, slightly asymmetric signal characteristic of superparamagnetic single-domain NPs17. Association of the MNPs with the bolavesicles resulted in significant modulation of the EPR spectra (Figure 1C, solid traces). Specifically, the EPR spectra acquired for the MNP/bolavesicles are noticeably broadened, ascribed to inter-particle distance which is not kinetically-averaged, due to embedding of the MNPs in the bolavesicles.
Importantly, the spectral changes were clearly correlated to the type of bolaamphiphile; the broad EPR component was much more dominant in GLH-20 vs. GLH-19 bolavesicles (Figure 1C). This result corroborates the cryo-TEM data shown in Figure IB, pointing to more condensed association of the MNPs inside the GLH-20 bolavesicles, likely resulting in less nanoparticle mobility (and hence broadened EPR signal). Example 13
Membrane interactions of magnetic bolavesicles
[00248] To investigate the interactions of the new magnetic bolavesicles with membranes the inventors applied fluorescence spectroscopy in conjunction with lipid bilayer model systems (Figure 2). Figure 2A depicts a kinetic experiment in which the magnetic bolavesicles were incubated with biomimetic lipid/polydiacetylene (PDA) vesicles18. The lipid/PDA vesicle platform has been shown to mimic lipid bilayer systems, providing spectroscopic means for monitoring bilayer interactions of membrane-active species19'20. In particular, the PDA domains in lipid/PDA vesicles undergo dramatic colorimetric and fluorescence transformations upon binding of substances to the vesicle bilayer, making lipid/PDA assemblies a sensitive sensor of membrane interaction21.
[00249] The kinetic fluorescence curves in Figure 2A, corresponding to the fluorescence of the PDA matrix induced upon binding of the bolavesicles to the lipid/PDA assemblies, point to significant differences in membrane interactions profiles both between the two types of studied bolavesicles (GLH-19 vs. GLH-20), but also between magnetic and non-magnetic bolavesicles. Specifically, Figure 2A demonstrates that GLH-19 bolavesicles gave rise to significantly higher fluorescence emission following incubation with DMPG/DMPC/PDA compared to GLH-20 bolavesicles. This result corresponds to more pronounced membrane interactions of GLH-19 bolavesicles, most likely ascribed to the positive choline moieties displayed at the bolavesicle surface that are consequently attracted to the negatively-charged lipid/PDA vesicles (which effectively mimic the negative plasma membrane of mammalian cells19'22 ).
[00250] The PDA fluorescence emission data in Figure 2A also underscore differences in membrane interactions between the free (non-magnetic) bolavesicles and bolavesicles embedding MNPs. Specifically, in both bolavesicle formulations (GLH-19 and GLH-20), the presence of the MNPs significantly promoted bilayer interactions and corresponding higher PDA fluorescence (broken curves in Figure 2A). This effect was particularly dramatic in case of GLH-19 - for which the inclusion of MNPs induced significantly more rapid and higher fluorescence intensity (top broken curve in Figure 2A). This result is consistent with the cryo-TEM results in Figure IB pointing to accumulation of the MNPs at the bolavesicle interface - which is the primary site for electrostatic binding to the membrane. In comparison, localization of the MNPs inside the GLH- 20 bolavesicles, apparent in the cryo-TEM image in Figure IB, is expected to result in lower disruption of the bolavesicle interface, giving rise to smaller alteration of membrane interactions compared to the non-magnetic bolavesicles (Figure 2A, bottom curves). [00251] To gain further information on the extent of bilayer insertion and lipid reorganization induced by the magnetic bolavesicles the inventors carried out fluorescence anisotropy experiments employing giant unilamellar vesicles (GUVs), which contain
phospholipids and trimethylammonium-diphenylhexatriene fluorescence dye (TMA-DPH, Figure 2B). DPH-containing hydrophobic molecules have been widely used for monitoring fluidity in lipid bilayers23; specifically, the fluorescence anisotropy of the bilayer-anchored DPH is a sensitive probe for changes in bilayer fluidity induced by membrane-active species23.
[00252] Similar to the biomimetic lipid/PDA assay results (Figure 2A), the fluorescence anisotropy data in Figure 2B underscore differences both between GLH-19 and GLH-20 bolavesicles, as well as between the magnetic bolavesicles and non-magnetic bolavesicles.
Specifically, Figure 2B shows a marked decrease in anisotropy when the DPH-containing GUVs were incubated with GLH-19 bolavesicles as compared to the GLH-20 bolavesicles. The lower fluorescence anisotropy is indicative of higher mobility of the DPH dye, brought about by binding and disruption of the lipid bilayer24 . This result echoes the PDA assay data (Figure 2A) pointing to significantly greater bilayer disruption by the GLH-19 bolavesicles as compared to the GLH-20 bolavesicles.
[00253] The fluorescence anisotropy data in Figure 2B also highlight the dramatic impact on membrane interactions of MNP incorporation within the bolavesicles. Indeed, both in case of GLH-19 and GLH-20, the magnetic bolavesicles gave rise to significantly lower fluorescence anisotropy of DPH following incubation with the DPH-TMA/lipid GUVs, compared to the respective non-magnetic bolavesicles. This result reflects more pronounced lipid reorganization induced by binding of the magnetic bolavesicles and again corroborates the interpretation of the PDA assay data in Figure 2A.
Example 14
Cell uptake of magnetic bolavesicles
[00254] The biophysical experiments in Figure 2 demonstrate more efficient membrane interactions of the magnetic bolavesicles as compared to their non-magnetic counterparts. The inventors investigated whether this trend is still apparent in the interaction of magnetic and nonmagnetic bolavesicles with brain capillary endothelial cells. To this end, the inventors used murine b.End3 cells, which are one of the most extensively used cell lines for brain uptake and permeability studies25. During in vitro growth, these cells possess many features that are characteristic to the BBB in vivo (e.g., monolayer formation that expresses the tight junctions proteins ZO-1, ZO-2, occludin and claudin-5, etc.)26. Previously, the inventors extensively used b.End3 cells to analyze uptake and intracellular fate of bolavesicles encapsulating model proteins and marker compounds8.
[00255] The extent of internalization of the bolavesicles encapsulating carboxyfluorescein
(CF, a common fluorescent dye in cell studies) compared to free CF in b.End3 cells were analyzed by fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS) at 4°C and 37°C (Figure 3). The FACS data clearly show that the cells were not able to internalize free CF at both temperatures (blue curves in Figure 3). This outcome is expected since CF is negatively charged in physiological pH. However, incubation of the CF-bolavesicles with the cells at 4°C resulted in small extent of endocytosis, as can be seen from the shift of the FACS curves to the right (Figure 3A,C). This shift is substantially higher at 37°C indicating an energy-dependent uptake of the bolavesicles by the cells. The FACS data also show that uptake of GLH-19 bolavesicles appeared more efficient at 37°C than GLH-20 bolavesicles (Figure 3B, and 3D), which is consistent with the more pronounced interactions of GLH-19 bolavesicles with membranes discussed above (Figure 2). An important observation apparent from Figure 3 is that the association of MNPs in the bolavesicles enhanced the uptake of the bolavesicles by the cells, particularly for the GLH-20-based formulations (Figure 3C, D). This MNPs-induced enhancement of bolavesicle uptake is small, however experimentally significant.
[00256] Confocal fluorescence microscopy analysis depicted in Figure 4 provides further insight into the uptake, stability, and localization of the magnetic bolavesicles vs. non-magnetic bolavesicles (comprised of GLH-19 or GLH-20 bolaamphiphiles) following incubation with the b.End3 cells. The microscopy data in Figure 4 complements the FACS experiments, and provide visual depiction of cell internalization of the fluorescent dye.
[00257] Several observations need to be emphasized in Figure 4. First, echoing the FACS experiments, CF was endocytosed by the bEnd.3 cells only when encapsulated within the bolavesicles (magnetic and non-magnetic alike). Also, these confocal images confirm that GLH- 19-based formulations were endocytosed more efficiently than the GLH-20-based formulations, and that addition of MNP to the formulation had minor effect on the uptake efficiency.
Significantly, in the case of GLH-19 bolavesicles (magnetic and non-magnetic), Figure 4 demonstrates that after 5 hr incubation almost all CF fluorescence is dispersed inside the cells, originating from the endocytosed material, with no significant fluorescence identified at the cell membrane. In contrast, the endocytosis of GLH-20-based bolavesicles after 5 hr is not complete, with a substantial number of (magnetic and non-magnetic) bolavesicles associated with the cell membranes (apparent as the punctuated green staining). This result nicely corroborates the biophysical experiments (Figure 2) which indicate much more efficient membrane binding and bilayer insertion of GLH-19 bolavesicles, as compared to GLH-20. [00258] Another noteworthy result in Figure 4 is the different distribution pattern of the fluorescent CF marker inside the b.End3 cells. In case of the GLH-19-based bolavesicles, diffuse green staining is observed, indicating intracellular disintegration of the vesicles following their uptake by the cells. In a dramatic contrast, a significant number of the endocytosed GLH-20- based magnetic bolavesicles were still intact, as can be seen from the mixed (diffuse + punctuated) pattern of the green CF fluorescence in the cells. This finding is important, since high stability of the DDS during the transcytosis via the brain endothelial cells is desired for the purpose of brain drug targeting. It should be also noted that the intracellular fate of the bolavesicles was assessed in this study following 5 hr in vitro incubation. For the purpose of brain-targeted delivery, much shorter time period would likely be sufficient. Indeed, the inventors previously observed substantial brain accumulation of a fluorescent dye encapsulated within GLH-20 bolavesicles already 30 min after intravenous administration8. The time period that is required for efficient brain-targeted delivery can be even shorter for the MNP-containing formulations that are exposed to an external magnetic field.
[00259] While the fluorescence confocal microscopy images in Figure 4 clearly show efficient b.End3 cell uptake of CF that originates from the bolavesicles, the inventors aimed to clarify whether the MNPs themselves were also internalized by the cells. To test this issue, the inventors performed live imaging of b.End3 cells that have endocytosed bolavesicles, in the presence and absence of an externally -placed magnet (Figure 5). Figure 5 visually demonstrates the remarkable effect of incubating the b.End3 cells with magnetic bolavesicles. Specifically, bolavesicles that encapsulated MNPs were attracted to the magnet, rapidly migrating towards it (Figure 5A). This result indicates that the MNPs initially encapsulated in the bolavesicles had indeed accumulated within the cells. In sharp contrast, cells incubated with bolavesicles that did not contain MNPs were totally unaffected by the magnetic field (Figure 5B). It should be also emphasized that b.End3 cells cannot endocytose free MNPs (non-vesicle embedded) because the oleic-acid-coated MNPs are highly hydrophobic and exhibit very high aggregation propensity in aqueous solutions
[00260] As described here a novel formulations of magnetic bolavesicles are produced through co-assembly of magnetic nanoparticles with bolaamphiphile/lipid unilamellar vesicles. The formulations are examined for their chemical and biophysical properties. Biophysical techniques employing model membrane systems and cell uptake experiments both point to enhancement of membrane interactions and cell uptake of the magnetic bolavesicles of the invention, compared to the non-magnetic counterparts. Characterization of the magnetic bolavesicles using EPR and cryo-TEM (Figure 1) confirms that the MNPs are associated within the bolavesicles. Interestingly, the MNPs interacted differently with GLH-19 and GLH-20 in the vesicle environments, most likely reflecting the distinct chemical structures of the two bolaamphiphiles.
[00261] The incorporation of MNPs within the bolavesicles was shown to significantly modulate interactions with membrane bilayers in model systems. Specifically, more pronounced binding to the bilayer interface and higher lipid mobility were induced by the membrane- interacting magnetic bolavesicles as compared to the non-magnetic particles. This outcome possibly relates to bolaamphiphile reorganization within the vesicles following embedding of the MNPs, leading to higher exposure of the bolaamphiphiles' positively-charged moieties close to the bolavesicle interface, and consequent pronounced interactions with the cell plasma membranes (which is generally negatively-charged). The marked increase in membrane interactions following incorporation of MNPs within the bolavesicles might be the primary factor enhancing the uptake and internalization of the particles by the brain endothelial cells. This observation is important, suggesting that magnetic bolavesicles might be excellent candidates for targeting and transport of different molecular cargoes into the brain. Based on our findings, magnetic bolavesicles appear to be generally suitable for brain-targeted delivery.
[00262] From the foregoing description, various modifications and changes in the compositions and methods provided herein will occur to those skilled in the art. All such modifications coming within the scope of the appended claims are intended to be included therein.
[00263] All publications, including but not limited to patents and patent applications, cited in this specification are herein incorporated by reference as if each individual publication were specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference herein as though fully set forth.
[00264] At least some of the chemical names of compounds of the invention as given and set forth in this application, may have been generated on an automated basis by use of a commercially available chemical naming software program, and have not been independently verified. Representative programs performing this function include the Lexichem naming tool sold by Open Eye Software, Inc. and the Autonom Software tool sold by MDL, Inc. In the instance where the indicated chemical name and the depicted structure differ, the depicted structure will control.
[00265] Chemical structures shown herein were prepared using ISIS®/DRAW. Any open valency appearing on a carbon, oxygen or nitrogen atom in the structures herein indicates the presence of a hydrogen atom. Where a chiral center exists in a structure but no specific stereochemistry is shown for the chiral center, both enantiomers associated with the chiral structure are encompassed by the structure. ] REFERENCES
Ueno, M. Mechanisms of the penetration of blood-borne substances into the brain. Current Neuropharmacology 2009 , 7, 142-9.
Gabathuler, R. Approaches to transport therapeutic drugs across the blood-brain barrier to treat brain diseases. Neurobiology of Disease 2010, 37, 48-57.
Fuhrhop, J.-FL; Wang, T. Bolaamphiphiles. Chemlnform 2004, 35.
Benvegnu, T.; Lemiegre, L.; Cammas-Marion, S. New generation of liposomes called archaeosomes based on natural or synthetic archaeal lipids as innovative formulations for drug delivery. Recent Patents on Drug Delivery & Formulation 2009, 3, 206-20.
Grinberg, S.; Kolot, V.; Linder, C; Shaubi, E.; Kas'yanov, V.; Deckelbaum, R. J.;
Heldman, E. Synthesis of novel cationic bolaamphiphiles from vernonia oil and their aggregated structures. Chemistry and Physics of Lipids 2008, 153, 85-97.
Popov, M.; Linder, C; Deckelbaum, R. J.; Grinberg, S.; Hansen, I. H.; Shaubi, E.; Waner, T.; Heldman, E. Cationic vesicles from novel bolaamphiphilic compounds. Journal of Liposome Research 2010, 20, 147-59.
Grinberg, S.; Kipnis, N.; Linder, C; Kolot, V.; Heldman, E. Asymmetric bolaamphiphiles from vernonia oil designed for drug delivery. European Journal of Lipid Science and Technology 2010, 112, 137-151.
Dakwar, G. R.; Abu Hammad, I.; Popov, M.; Linder, C; Grinberg, S.; Heldman, E.;
Stepensky, D. Delivery of proteins to the brain by bolaamphiphilic nano-sized vesicles. Journal of Controlled Release 2012, 160, 315-21.
Sun, C; Lee, J. S. H.; Zhang, M. Magnetic nanoparticles in MR imaging and drug delivery. Advanced Drug Delivery Reviews 2008, 60, 1252-65.
Arruebo, M.; Fernandez-pacheco, R.; Ibarra, M. R.; Santamaria, J. Magnetic nanoparticles Controlled release of drugs from nanostructured functional materials. Nanotoday 2007, 2, 22-32. (11) Ito, A.; Shinkai, M.; Honda, FL; Kobayashi, T. Medical application of functionalized magnetic nanoparticles. Journal of Bioscience and Bioengineering 2005, 100, 1-11.
Chertok, B.; Moffat, B. a; David, A. E.; Yu, F.; Bergemann, C; Ross, B. D.; Yang, V. C. Iron oxide nanoparticles as a drug delivery vehicle for MRI monitored magnetic targeting of brain tumors. Biomaterials 2008, 29, 487-96.
Chertok, B.; David, A. E.; Yang, V. C. Polyethyleneimine-modified iron oxide nanoparticles for brain tumor drug delivery using magnetic targeting and intra-carotid administration. Biomaterials 2010, 31, 6317-24.
Dobson, J. Magnetic Nanoparticles for Drug Delivery. Drug Development Research 2006, 60, 55-60.
Gonzales, M.; Krishnan, K. M. Synthesis of magnetoliposomes with monodisperse iron oxide nanocrystal cores for hyperthermia. Journal of Magnetism and Magnetic Materials 2005, 293, 265-270.
Lubbe, A. S.; Bergemann, C; Brock, J.; Mcclure, D. G. Physiological aspects in magnetic drug-targeting. Journal of Magnetism and Magnetic Materials 1999, 194, 149-155.
K5seoglu, Y.; Yildiz, F.; Kim, D. K.; Muhammed, M.; Aktas, B. EPR studies on Na-oleate coated Fe304 nanoparticles. Physica Status Solidi (C) 2004, 1, 351 1-3515.
Raifman, O.; Kolusheva, S.; Comin, M. J.; Kedei, N.; Lewin, N. E.; Blumberg, P. M.; Marquez, V. E.; Jelinek, R. Membrane anchoring of diacylglycerol lactones substituted with rigid hydrophobic acyl domains correlates with biological activities. The FEBS Journal 2010, 277, 233^13.
Kolusheva, S.; Boyer, L.; Jelinek, R. A colorimetric assay for rapid screening of antimicrobial peptides. Nature Biotechnology 2000, 18, 225-7.
Kolusheva, S.; Shahal, T.; Jelinek, R. Peptide-membrane interactions studied by a new phospholipid/polydiacetylene colorimetric vesicle assay. Biochemistry 2000, 39, 15851-9.
(21) Jelinek, R.; Kolusheva, S. Polymerized lipid vesicles as colorimetric biosensors for
biotechnological applications. Biotechnology Advances 2001, 19, 109-18. Kolusheva, S.; Kafri, R.; Katz, M.; Jelinek, R. Rapid colorimetric detection of antibody - epitope recognition at a biomimetic membrane interface. Journal of the American
Chemical Society 2001, 123, All -22.
Lasch, J. Interaction of detergents with lipid vesicles. Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1995, 1241, 269-92.
M, S. Membrane fluidity in malignancy. Adversative and recuperative. Biochimica et Biophysica Acta 1984, 738, 251-261.
Li, G.; Simon, M. J.; Cancel, L. M.; Shi, Z.-D.; Ji, X.; Tarbell, J. M.; Morrison, B.; Fu, B. M. Permeability of endothelial and astrocyte cocultures: in vitro blood-brain barrier models for drug delivery studies. Annals of Biomedical Engineering 2010, 38, 2499-51 1.
Brown, R. C; Morris, A. P.; O'Neil, R. G. Tight junction protein expression and barrier properties of immortalized mouse brain microvessel endothelial cells. Brain Research 2007, 1130, 17-30.
Volinsky, R.; Kliger, M.; Sheynis, T.; Kolusheva, S.; Jelinek, R. Glass-supported lipid/polydiacetylene films for colour sensing of membrane-active compounds. Biosensors & Bioelectronics 2007, 22, 3247-51.
Moscho, A.; Orwar, O. W. E.; Chiu, D. T.; Modi, B. P.; Zare, R. N. Rapid preparation of giant unilamellar vesicles. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 1996, 93, 1 1443-11447.

Claims

CLAIMS WHAT IS CLAIMED IS;
1. A pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound, metal, or an alloy capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
2. A method of delivering drugs or imaging agents into animal or human brain comprosing the step of administering to the animal or human a pharmaceutical composition comprising of a bolaamphiphile complex; and wherein the bolaamphiphile complex comprises one or more bolaamphiphilic compounds and a compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticles.
3. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to either of claims 1 or
2, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound consists of two hydrophilic headgroups linked through a long hydrophobic chain.
4. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1-
3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula I:
HG2 L1 HG
I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group; and
L1 is alkylene, alkenyl, heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
5. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 4, wherein
L1 is heteroalkylene, or heteroalkenyl linker comprising C, N, and O atoms; unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C20 alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxo.
6. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 4, wherein L1 is -0-(CH2)nl-0-C(0)-(CH2)n2-C(0)-0-(CH2)„3-0-.
7. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 4, wherein L1 is
-0-L2-C(0)-0-(CH2)n4-0-C(0)-L3-0-, or
-0-L2-C(0)-0-(CH2)„5-0-C(0)-(CH2)„6-, and wherein each L2 and L3 is C4-C20 alkenyl linker; unsubstituted or substituted with d- Cs alkyl or hydroxy;
and n4, n5, and n6 is independently an integer from 4-20.
8. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 7, wherein each L2 and L3 is independently -C(R1)-C(OH)-CH2-(CH=CH)-(CH2)n7-; R1 is d-Cg alkyl, and n7 is independently an integer from 4-20.
9. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 4, wherein L1 is
Figure imgf000080_0001
Linker AA
Figure imgf000080_0002
Linker BB
Figure imgf000080_0003
Linker CC or
Figure imgf000080_0004
Linker DD wherein:
each Z1 and Z2 is independently -C(R3)2-, -N(R3)- or -0-;
each Rla, Rlb, R3, and R4 is independently H or Ci-C8 alkyl; each R2a and R2b is independently H , Ci-Cs alkyl, OH, or alkoxy;
each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
and wherein each methylene carbon is unsubstituted or substituted with C1-C4 alkyl; and each nl, n2, and n3 is independently an integer from 4-20.
10. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1-, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, orI:
Figure imgf000081_0001
Figure imgf000081_0002
Figure imgf000081_0003
IV
Figure imgf000081_0004
V , or
Figure imgf000082_0001
VI
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each HG1 and HG2 is independently a hydrophilic head group;
each Z1 and Z2 is independently -C(R3)2-, -N(R3)- or -0-;
each Rla, Rlb, R3, and R4 is independently H or Ci-C8 alkyl;
each R2a and R2b is independently H , Ci-C8 alkyl, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG1 or O-HG2; each n8, n9, ni l, and nl2 is independently an integer from 1-20;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
1 1. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 10, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 2-12.
12. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 10, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each n9 and nl 1 is independently an integer from 4-12.
13. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 10, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each n9 and ni l is 7 or 11.
14. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 13, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each n8 and nl2 is independently 1, 2, 3, or 4.
15. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 13, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each n8 and n 12 is 1.
16. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 15, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each R2a and R2b is independently H, OH, alkoxy, or O-HG1 or O-HG2.
17. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 15, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, or IV; and each R2a and R2b is independently H, OH, or OMe.
18. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 15, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each R2a and R2b is H or OH.
19. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 18, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Rla and Rlb is independently H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl.
20. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 18, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Rla and Rlb is independently n-pentyl.
21. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 20, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each dotted bond is a single bond.
22. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-
20, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each dotted bond is a double bond.
23. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 22, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, or V; nlO is an integer from 2-16.
24. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 22, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, or V; and nlO is an integer from 2-12.
25. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 9-
21, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, or V; and nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
26. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10-
22, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula VI; and R4 is H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl.
27. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 22, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula VI; and R4 is Me.
28. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 27, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Z1 and Z2 is independently C(R3)2-, or -N(R3)-.
29. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 27, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Z1 and Z2 is independently C(R3)2-, or -N(R3)-; and each R3 is independently H, Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, or isopentyl.
30. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 10- 27, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Z1 and Z2 is independently C(R3)2-, or -N(R3)-; and each R3 is H.
31. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of 10-27, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each Z1 and Z2 is -0-.
32. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 31, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula II, III, IV, V, or VI; and each HG1 and HG2 is independently selected from:
Figure imgf000084_0001
wherein:
X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl; each R8 is
independently H, substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl, alkoxy, or carboxy;
ml is 0 or 1 ; and
each nl3, nl4, and nl5 is independently an integer from 1-20.
33. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 32, wherein each ml is 0.
34. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 32, wherein each ml is 1.
35. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 32, wherein each nl3 is 1 or 2.
36. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 32, wherein each nl4 and nl5 is independently 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
37. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to claim 32, wherein each nl4 and nl5 is independently 2 or 3.
38. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vila, Vllb, VIIc, or VIId:
Figure imgf000085_0001
VIIc
or
Figure imgf000085_0002
VI Id
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein: each X is -NR R , or -N R R R , each R , and R is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl; each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
39. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Villa, Vlllb, VIIIc, or VIIId:
Figure imgf000086_0001
Villa
Figure imgf000086_0002
Vlllb
Figure imgf000086_0003
Vlllc
-X
( )ii >T
o o
Vllld
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl; each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
40. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula IXa, IXb, or IXc:
Figure imgf000087_0001
Figure imgf000087_0002
IXb
Figure imgf000087_0003
IXc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl; each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
41. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Xa, Xb, or Xc:
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000088_0002
Xb
Figure imgf000088_0003
Xc or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, hydrate, prodrug, stereoisomer, tautomer, isotopic variant, or N-oxide thereof, or a combination thereof;
wherein:
each X is -NR5aR5b, or -N+R5aR5bR5c; each R5a, and R5b is independently H or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl or R5a and R5b may join together to form an N containing substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
each R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl;;
nlO is an integer from 2-20; and
each dotted bond is independently a single or a double bond.
42. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 38- 41, wherein each dotted bond is a single bond.
43. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 38- 41, wherein each dotted bond is a double bond.
44. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 38- 41, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vlla-VIId, Villa- VHId, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc; nlO is an integer from 2-16.
45. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 38- 43, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vlla-VIId, Villa- VHId, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc; and nlO is an integer from 2-12.
46. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 38- 43, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a compound according to formula Vlla-VIId, Vllla-VIIId, IXa-IXc, or Xa-Xc; and nlO is 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, or 16.
47. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein each R5a, R5b, and R5c is independently substituted or unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl.
48. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein each R5a, R5b, and R5c is independently unsubstituted C1-C20 alkyl.
49. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein one of R5a, R5b, and R5c is C1-C20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R6; and R6 is C1-C20 alkyl.
50. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein two of R5a, R5b, and R5c are independently C1-C20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R6; and R6 is C1-C20 alkyl.
51. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein one of R5a, R5b, and R5c is C1-C20 alkyl substituted with -OC(0)R6; and R6 is Me, Et, n-Pr, i-Pr, n-Bu, i-Bu, sec-Bu, n-pentyl, isopentyl, n-hexyl, n-heptyl, or n-octyl.
52. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein one of R5a, R5b, and R5c is C1-C20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
53. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein two of R5a, R5b, and R5c are independently C1-C20 alkyl substituted with amino, alkylamino or dialkylamino.
54. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or
unsubstituted heteroaryl.
55. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or
unsubstituted pyridyl.
56. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein R5a, and R5b together with the N they are attached to form substituted or
unsubstituted monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl.
57. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is substituted or unsubstituted
Figure imgf000090_0001
58. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is
Figure imgf000090_0002
substituted with one or more groups selected from alkoxy, acetyl, and substituted or unsubstituted Ph.
59. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is
Figure imgf000090_0003
60. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is - Me2 or -N+Me3.
61. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is -N(Me)-CH2CH2-OAc or -N+(Me)2-CH2CH2-OAc.
62. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 32- 46, wherein X is a chitosanyl group.
63. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is a pharmaceutically acceptable salt.
64. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of the preceding claims, the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt.
65. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 62, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is in a form of a quaternary salt with
pharmaceutically acceptable alkyl halide or alkyl tosylate.
66. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the bolaamphiphilic compound is any one of the bolaamphilic compounds listed in Table 1.
67. The method or the pharmaceutical composition according to any one of claims 1- 3, wherein the pharmaceutical composition comprises a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
68. The pharmaceutical composition of Claim 67 wherein the carrier is a parenteral carrier.
69. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a bolaamphilic compound according to formula I.
70. A pharmaceutical formulation comprising a bolaamphilic compound according to formula I, and a magnetic nanoparticle.
71. The formulation according to formula 69 or 70, wherein the formulation is useful for delivering drugs or imaging agents into the brain.
72. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle or the compound capable of forming magnetic nanoparticle is Fe304.
73. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises magnetic elements.
74. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises iron, nickel or cobalt or their chemical compounds.
75. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises a metal oxide.
76. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises ferrite nanoparticles.
77. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises ferrite nanoparticles modified by surfactants, silicones or phosphoric acid derivatives to increase their stability in solution.
78. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises metallic nanoparticle.
79. The method, the pharmaceutical composition, or the formulation according to any one of claims 1-71, wherein the magnetic nanoparicle comprises CoO.
PCT/US2013/057959 2012-09-04 2013-09-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof WO2014039503A1 (en)

Priority Applications (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CA2883788A CA2883788A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2013-09-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2013312910A AU2013312910B2 (en) 2012-09-04 2013-09-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
EP13835778.5A EP2892512A4 (en) 2012-09-04 2013-09-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
IL237540A IL237540B (en) 2012-09-04 2015-03-03 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US14/638,448 US20150238611A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2015-03-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US16/044,797 US20190076533A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2018-07-25 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US17/131,475 US20210106687A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2020-12-22 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201261696781P 2012-09-04 2012-09-04
US61/696,781 2012-09-04

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/638,448 Continuation US20150238611A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2015-03-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014039503A1 true WO2014039503A1 (en) 2014-03-13

Family

ID=50237568

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2013/057959 WO2014039503A1 (en) 2012-09-04 2013-09-04 Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (3) US20150238611A1 (en)
EP (1) EP2892512A4 (en)
AU (1) AU2013312910B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2883788A1 (en)
IL (1) IL237540B (en)
WO (1) WO2014039503A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3896174A4 (en) * 2018-12-10 2022-08-17 MD Healthcare Inc. Nanovesicles derived from bacteria of genus sphingomonas and uses of same

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20150306236A1 (en) * 2012-09-04 2015-10-29 Lauren Sciences Llc Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
CN105641711B (en) * 2016-01-25 2019-01-15 四川大学 Using organic amine-modified vitamin C as the dual Brain targeting prodrug of carrier

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003047499A2 (en) 2001-12-04 2003-06-12 Ben Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Amphiphilic compounds and vesicles/liposomes for organ-specific drug targeting
WO2005108302A2 (en) 2004-03-19 2005-11-17 Research Foundation Of The City University Of New York Magnetic nanotubes
US20090011002A1 (en) 2005-01-03 2009-01-08 Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Nano - and Mesosized Particles Comprising an Inorganic Core, Process and Applications Thereof
WO2010128504A2 (en) 2009-05-04 2010-11-11 Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Nano-sized particles comprising multi-headed amphiphiles for targeted drug delivery

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
LU86022A1 (en) * 1985-07-25 1987-02-04 Cird POLYCYLIC AROMATIC DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS AND THEIR APPLICATION IN THE PHARMACEUTICAL AND COSMETIC FIELDS
US5320906A (en) * 1986-12-15 1994-06-14 Vestar, Inc. Delivery vehicles with amphiphile-associated active ingredient
US5441746A (en) * 1989-12-22 1995-08-15 Molecular Bioquest, Inc. Electromagnetic wave absorbing, surface modified magnetic particles for use in medical applications, and their method of production
US5389377A (en) * 1989-12-22 1995-02-14 Molecular Bioquest, Inc. Solid care therapeutic compositions and methods for making same
AU2003298647A1 (en) * 2002-11-14 2004-06-15 Claussen, Randal, C. Synthesis and self-assembly of abc triblock bola peptide

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2003047499A2 (en) 2001-12-04 2003-06-12 Ben Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Amphiphilic compounds and vesicles/liposomes for organ-specific drug targeting
WO2005108302A2 (en) 2004-03-19 2005-11-17 Research Foundation Of The City University Of New York Magnetic nanotubes
US20090011002A1 (en) 2005-01-03 2009-01-08 Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Nano - and Mesosized Particles Comprising an Inorganic Core, Process and Applications Thereof
WO2010128504A2 (en) 2009-05-04 2010-11-11 Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Nano-sized particles comprising multi-headed amphiphiles for targeted drug delivery

Non-Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CHALON SYLVIE ET AL.: "Pharmacological Characterization of (E)-N-(4-Fluorobut-2-enyl)-2beta-carbomethoxy-3beta-(4'tolyl)nortropane (LBT-999) as a Highly Promising Fluorinated Ligand for the Dopamine Transporter.", THE JOURNAL OF PHARMACOLOGY AND EXPERIMENTAL THERAPEUTICS, vol. 317, no. 1, 2006, pages 147 - 152, XP055238611 *
LU AN-HUI ET AL.: "Magnetic Nanoparticles: Synthesis, Protection, Functionalization, and Application.", ANGEW. CHEM. INT. ED., vol. 46, 2007, pages 1222 - 1244, XP008128389 *
MATSUI H ET AL.: "Crystalline glycylglycine bolaamphiphile tubules and their pH-sensitive structural transformation", JOURNAL OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY. B, MATERIALS, SURFACES, INTERFACES AND BIOPHYSICAL, vol. 104, no. 15, 1 January 2000 (2000-01-01), pages 3383 - 3386, XP009105307, DOI: doi:10.1021/jp994117p
See also references of EP2892512A4
SHIMIZU: "Self-assembled lipid nanotube hosts: The dimension control for encapsulation of nanometer-scale guest substances", JOURNAL OF POLYMER SCIENCE PART A: POLYMER CHEMISTRY, vol. 44, no. 17, 1 September 2006 (2006-09-01), pages 5137 - 5152, XP055251753, DOI: doi:10.1002/pola.21619
STEPHANIE GELINAS ET AL.: "Characterization of rigid and stable monolayers of a dibenzoic acid diamide bolaamphiphile on nanosized maghemite particles", COLLOIDS AND SURFACES. A, PHYSICACHEMICAL AND ENGINEERING ASPECTS, vol. 172, no. 1-3, 1 October 2000 (2000-10-01), pages 103 - 112, XP055251738, DOI: doi:10.1016/S0927-7757(00)00570-7

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP3896174A4 (en) * 2018-12-10 2022-08-17 MD Healthcare Inc. Nanovesicles derived from bacteria of genus sphingomonas and uses of same
US11529377B2 (en) 2018-12-10 2022-12-20 Md Healthcare Inc. Nano-vesicles derived from genus Sphingomonas bacteria and use thereof
US11944652B2 (en) 2018-12-10 2024-04-02 Md Healthcare Inc. Nano-vesicles derived from genus Sphingomonas bacteria and use thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20190076533A1 (en) 2019-03-14
IL237540B (en) 2019-08-29
AU2013312910A1 (en) 2015-03-26
EP2892512A1 (en) 2015-07-15
US20210106687A1 (en) 2021-04-15
CA2883788A1 (en) 2014-03-13
AU2013312910B2 (en) 2017-09-14
EP2892512A4 (en) 2016-04-27
US20150238611A1 (en) 2015-08-27
IL237540A0 (en) 2015-04-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20210106687A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US20190381137A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2022200494A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2013312909B2 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2018202949B2 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US11304964B2 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US20220249539A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US20150110875A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US20220072098A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
US20180021368A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
AU2016248992A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof
EP2892508A1 (en) Bolaamphiphilic compounds, compositions and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13835778

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2883788

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 237540

Country of ref document: IL

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013312910

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20130904

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2013835778

Country of ref document: EP